JP5805458B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays a result of an internal lottery by displaying a symbol after variably displaying it.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having two starting ports is known (for example, see Patent Document 1). In this prior art, one of the two start ports is configured to easily win a game ball, and the other start port is configured not to easily win a game ball ( Closed electric tulip). And if a winning occurs at the starting point where the winning is difficult, and a winning result is obtained, a winning occurs at the starting point where the winning is likely to occur and the winning result is obtained. Compared to the case, a selection table in which the ratio of entering the time reduction state is set high is referred to.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Literature 1, when a special game state occurs when a winning occurs at the starting port where it is difficult for a winning to occur, the normally variable winning device (electric tulip) performs the second operation. It becomes easy to be in a state (short-time operation state). Therefore, the player can advantageously develop the subsequent games, and if the winning result is obtained by winning the starting point where the winning is difficult to occur, the player's sense of achievement and satisfaction It is thought that the feeling can be satisfied.

  Further, similarly to the technique of Patent Document 1, a gaming machine in which two starting ports are formed is disclosed (for example, see Patent Document 2). In the technique of Patent Document 2, there are a first start port and a second start port, and the second start port is also configured such that winning of a game ball is difficult to occur in a non-time-shortened state. Yes. Here, in the technology of Patent Document 2, a new concept of production points is used, and when a winning is generated at the second starting point where a winning of a game ball is difficult to occur, the effect points are accumulated. ing. This effect point quantitatively represents an expected value for displaying the special effect, and the special effect is executed when the effect points are accumulated up to a predetermined value.

  For this reason, according to the technique of Patent Document 2, an added value is given to the second starting port, thereby giving a motivation to try to win the second starting port, and a big hit game is generated. It is considered that the monotony of the game in the process up to this point can be eliminated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as a prior art different from these prior arts, the main game (ordinary design game) is executed based on the game ball entering the normal design start port, and the game ball to the special design start port is executed. There is a technique in which the ball is positioned whether or not the continuous big hit state is continued (for example, Patent Document 3).

  The gaming machine of Patent Document 3 is configured so that a special symbol lottery is executed for the first time if a winning occurs when a variable member (movable piece of an electric tulip) is opened in a normal symbol lottery. is there. In this case, the opening time of the variable member is set longer, and when the variable member is in the open state, the configuration of the board surface partially or completely hinders the entry route to the attacker. In such an open state at the time of the first hit, it is in a state where almost no prize can be expected for an attacker arranged below the electric tulip. However, even in such a case, it is not completely impossible to expect an attacker to win, and it is possible that an attacker may win a prize very rarely.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 3, when such a rare winning is realized, not only a privilege of paying out a prize ball to the player but also a specific effect (for example, a two-dimensional code) in the effect output means Etc. are displayed). For this reason, according to the technique of patent document 3, as a result of providing an unprecedented performance execution opportunity, it is considered that the range of effects of the gaming machine can be expanded.

JP 2008-289795 A JP 2007-296163 A JP 2010-167098 A

A common point between the above-described prior arts is that a plurality of starting openings are formed, and among them, there are a starting opening where a winning is likely to occur and a starting opening where a winning is difficult to occur.
And when a prize is generated at the starting point where it is difficult for a prize to occur, a lot of times are given, a production point is given, a two-dimensional code is displayed, and a prize is generated. It is characterized in that a privilege is given to the occurrence of a winning at a difficult starting opening, and a certain advantage is given to the starting opening where winning is difficult.

  Here, in recent gaming machines, the profit that the player can enjoy when winning by the internal lottery by the second special symbol is set larger than when winning by the internal lottery by the first special symbol. The number of models is increasing. For example, the technique of Patent Document 1 described above is not an exception, and the number of time reductions given is set more in the case of winning in the second special symbol than in the case of winning in the first special symbol.

  Further, in recent gaming machines, an increasing number of gaming machines are equipped with a probability variation function in which a high winning probability is set as compared with a normal state winning probability. At this time, even if it corresponds to the winning symbol that activates the probability variation function, in order to maintain the player's tension, there may be an effect that keeps that secret on the effect is there. Specifically, a normal effect design that is not a probability variation effect design is stopped and displayed in a set of three to produce a big hit (for example, “2”-“2”-“2”), and the subsequent big hit game In some cases, an effect or the like that discloses that a high-probability state has been set is executed (so-called promotion of a major player). Even if the promotion effect during the big role fails or the promotion effect is not executed during the big role, the time reduction state that has entered afterwards may actually be a high probability state and a time reduction state.

  In such a situation, for example, there is a possibility that a problem may arise when trying to execute some probability change promotion effect in the time shortened state. As described above, since the second special symbol often sets the profit that the player can enjoy more than the first special symbol, when winning in the second special symbol, for example, with the gaming machine This is because the probability of corresponding to a jackpot (for example, 14 rounds, 14 rounds probabilistic jackpots) for obtaining the maximum profit is set high.

Under such a setting environment, in the normal state where the time reduction function is not operating, if the chance to win the lottery with the second special symbol happens to be obtained, the lottery with the second special symbol is executed. As a result, the chances of getting the maximum profit are still high.
However, if the maximum profit cannot be obtained at this point, the chance state that the maximum profit may be obtained may be changed to a non-chance state at a stretch. That is, for the second special symbol, the probability that the maximum profit can be obtained is increased, and if the maximum profit is not obtained, the winning symbol corresponding to the minimum profit is won ( This means that a low probability state is likely to be set). Therefore, even if some probability variation promotion effect is executed in a time shortened state thereafter, the expectation level is extremely lowered, and the reliability of the probability variation promotion effect may be decreased.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of suppressing a reduction in the expectation level of an effect to be executed after the end of a big hit game, even when winning in the second symbol in a normal state.

The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems.
Solution 1: In other words, the gaming machine of the present invention is based on the player's profit (for example, the operation of the variable winning device) on condition that either the first predetermined event or the second predetermined event that becomes a lottery trigger occurs during the game. A lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery related to a profit that triggers) and when the internal lottery is executed by the lottery execution means, the first predetermined event or the second predetermined event over a predetermined variation time Aspects corresponding to the result of the internal lottery after the first symbol or the second symbol corresponding to the event (for example, a symbol visually recognized) is displayed in a variable manner (for example, a state associated with the winning in advance) ) Obtained by the symbol drawing means for stopping and displaying (determining and displaying) the first symbol or the second symbol and the internal lottery executed on condition that the first predetermined event has occurred. As a result of the selection, the first symbol winning type defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of winning types including at least a special winning type and the internal lottery executed on condition that the second predetermined event has occurred are obtained. As for the result of winning, when the second symbol winning type defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of winning types including at least the special winning type, and when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, the current winning is determined as the first symbol A winning type determining means for determining which one of a plurality of winning types specified by the winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means corresponds to the first symbol or the second by at least the symbol displaying means. A variation pattern that predefines multiple types of variation patterns, including basic variation patterns and special variation patterns, with respect to the variation time during which symbols are displayed in a variable manner A variation pattern for selecting one of the plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining unit when executing the variation display of the first symbol or the second symbol by the determination unit and the symbol display unit If the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing winning by the symbol display means as a result of the selection means and the result of the internal lottery corresponding to winning, a special condition different from the normal condition It is determined that the special game execution means for executing the special game to which the condition is applied and the result of the internal lottery correspond to the winning and the special winning type specified by the first symbol winning type specifying means. While the special game executed in the case of the After the special game executed when it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a winning and the special winning type specified by the second symbol winning type specifying means is determined, For the special period until the number of changes after special game corresponding to the number of times of the variable display and stop display of the first symbol or the second symbol executed by the symbol display means reaches the specified number of times, the variation pattern selection means The variation pattern restriction that restricts the type of the variation pattern that can be selected to the special variation pattern and restricts the type of the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern selection means to the basic variation pattern for periods other than the special period. A gaming machine comprising means.

A game by the gaming machine of the present invention proceeds, for example, along the flow shown below. The wording in parentheses is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
(1) Internal lottery on condition that either a first predetermined event (winning at the upper starting prize opening) or a second predetermined event (winning at the lower starting prize opening) occurs during the game (Special symbol lottery) is performed. For this reason, the player plays a game with the first goal being to generate a prize at the upper start prize opening or the lower start prize opening which becomes the lottery opportunity.

(2) When the internal lottery is executed according to (1) above, the first symbol (first special symbol) corresponding to the first predetermined event or the second predetermined event of (1) over a predetermined variation time Alternatively, the second symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed, and the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery in (1) above. That is, the first symbol is variably displayed on the condition that the first predetermined event has occurred, and the second symbol is variably displayed on the condition that the second predetermined event has occurred. In this case, a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) is required until the stop display is performed after the display of the first symbol or the second symbol is changed, and once the first symbol or the second symbol is displayed. When the symbol variation display is started, the next lottery is not performed until the stop display is completed.

(3) A plurality of winning types including at least a special winning type (7 per 14 rounds probable big hit) with respect to the winning result obtained by the internal lottery executed on condition that the first predetermined event of (1) has occurred. Is defined in advance.
(4) A plurality of winning types including at least a special winning type (7 per 14 rounds probable big change) with respect to the winning result obtained by the internal lottery executed on condition that the second predetermined event of (1) has occurred. Is defined in advance. For this reason, even if it is won by an internal lottery that is executed on the condition that the first predetermined event has occurred, it is a case that it has been won by an internal lottery that is executed on the condition that the second predetermined event has occurred. Even so, there is room for “special winning types”.
(5) When the result of the internal lottery in (1) corresponds to winning, it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined in (3) or (4) is applicable.

(6) Regarding the variation pattern of the first symbol or the second symbol in (2) above, a plurality of types of variation patterns including a basic variation pattern and a special variation pattern are defined in advance. Here, the “basic variation pattern” is a variation pattern that is most frequently used during a game, and includes a variation pattern for a low probability state, a variation pattern for a high probability state, a variation pattern for a time shortened state, and the like. is there. Also, the “special variation pattern” is a variation pattern different from the “basic variation pattern”, and is selected regardless of the internal state when it becomes a special variation state (for example, up to the fourth variation after the big hit game). Variation pattern. The special variation pattern is not limited to one variation pattern, and a plurality of types may be prepared therein (for example, special variation pattern A, special variation pattern B, etc.).

(7) When starting the variation display of the first symbol or the second symbol in (2) above, any one variation pattern is selectively determined from among the plurality of variation patterns defined in (6) above. Is done.
(8) If the result of the internal lottery in (1) corresponds to a win, and the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner representing the win in (2) above, normal conditions (for example, internal lottery A special game is applied to which a special condition (for example, a condition that the variable winning device is continuously operated without internal lottery and symbol variation being performed) different from the condition that the symbol variation is performed is applied. The special game basically corresponds to a game such as a 14-round jackpot game, but is a concept including a jackpot game or the like that is a 14-round jackpot but can obtain substantially the same profit as the 10-round jackpot.

(9) When the result of the internal lottery in (1) corresponds to the winning and it is determined that it corresponds to the special winning type specified in (3) above, the special game of (8) above is executed. After completion, the type of variation pattern that can be selected according to the above (7) is restricted to the basic variation pattern. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery in (1) corresponds to winning, and it is determined that it corresponds to the special winning type specified in (4) above, the special in (8) above is executed. For the special period after the end of the game and until the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 4 times), the type of variation pattern that can be selected according to (7) is restricted to the special variation pattern. In addition, for the periods other than the special period, the type of variation pattern that can be selected according to the above (7) is restricted to the basic variation pattern.

  Therefore, if the special winning type is selected in the first symbol lottery, the basic variation pattern is selected immediately after the end of the special game. If the special winning type is selected in the second symbol lottery, the special game is ended. After passing through the selection of the special variation pattern a predetermined number of times, the basic variation pattern is selected. The “number of fluctuations after the special game” is the number of times of the variable display and stop display of the first symbol or the second symbol executed according to (2) after the end of the special game. Is executed once and the stop display of the first symbol is executed once, the number of fluctuations after the special game is “1”. Further, the “specified number of times” is not limited to the above value, and a value of 5 times or more may be set depending on the game specifications.

In this way, according to the present solution, when the special winning type is found in the first symbol lottery, the basic variation state (non-special variation state) is immediately obtained after the special game ends, whereas the second When a special win type is found in the symbol lottery, after the special game is over, the basic variation state is entered after passing through the special variation state a predetermined number of times.
For this reason, even if it corresponds to the same (same type) special winning type, it corresponds to the special winning type in the first symbol lottery and the special winning type in the second symbol lottery. Thus, it can be branched whether the basic fluctuation pattern is selected to be the basic fluctuation state or the special fluctuation pattern is selected to be the special fluctuation state.

Therefore, the basic variation pattern selection ratio and the special variation pattern selection ratio are adjusted depending on whether the first symbol lottery corresponds to the special winning type or the second symbol lottery corresponds to the special winning type. In addition, the role of the special winning type can be made different depending on whether it corresponds to the special winning type in the first symbol lottery or the special winning type in the second symbol lottery. For this reason, when it corresponds to the special winning type in the second symbol lottery, the role when it corresponds to the special winning type in the first symbol lottery, It can be turned to a role (transferred, accepted), and even if it is won in the second symbol in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the performance to be executed after the end of the big hit game from decreasing it can.
According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the role of the special winning type can be made different depending on whether it corresponds to the special winning type in the first symbol lottery or the special winning type in the second symbol lottery. Even when the probability variation promotion effect is executed after the end of the big hit game via the second symbol winning, it is possible to prevent the effect reliability (the effect expectation) from being lowered.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the solution 1, wherein the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and is defined by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means. When it is determined that it falls under the special winning type, after the special game is completed by the special game executing means, at the time of execution of the internal lottery by the lottery executing means, at least a normal winning probability is applied. High probability state setting means for setting a high probability state to which a higher winning probability is applied, and the special lottery result corresponding to the internal lottery result and defined by the first symbol winning type defining means It is disclosed that the high probability state is set by the high probability state setting means when the special game is executed when it is determined that the winning type is determined. A special game medium / high probability state disclosure effect executing means for executing another game medium / high probability state disclosure effect, and the special winning type defined by the second symbol winning type defining means when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning When the number of post-special game fluctuations after the end of the special game executed when it is determined to fall under is less than the specified number of times, and a result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, High-probability state non-disclosure effect with the content that the high-probability state has been set by the high-probability state setting unit using the special variation time of the special variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit A high-probability state non-disclosure effect executing means for executing the above, and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the special winning type specified by the second symbol winning type specifying means is Then, if it is determined that the number of fluctuations after the special game after the completion of the special game that has been executed reaches the specified number of times, and if the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, the fluctuation High probability of executing a high-probability state disclosure effect with the content disclosing that the high-probability state is set by the high-probability state setting unit using the special variation time of the special variation pattern selected by the pattern selection unit A gaming machine further comprising state disclosure effect executing means.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) When it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the win and corresponds to the special win type, the win probability of the internal lottery is set to a high probability state after the special game ends. For this reason, if it falls under the “special winning type”, either through the first symbol lottery or the second symbol lottery, the special game will be shifted to a high probability state after the end of the special game. .

(2) Here, when it corresponds to the “special winning type” via the first symbol lottery, the high probability state disclosure effect is disclosed with the content disclosing that the high probability state is set in the special game. .
(3) On the other hand, if it falls under the “special winning type” via the second symbol lottery, and the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than the prescribed number (for example, if the prescribed number is set to “4”) If the number of fluctuations after the special game is “1”, “2” or “3”) and the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, using the special fluctuation time of the special fluctuation pattern, A high-probability state non-disclosure effect is executed with the content that the high-probability state is set according to (1) above.

(4) And, if it corresponds to “special winning type” via the second symbol lottery, if the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the specified number of times (for example, if the specified number of times is set to “4”) If the number of fluctuations after the special game is “4”) and the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, the high probability state according to (1) above using the special fluctuation time of the special fluctuation pattern A high-probability state disclosure effect is executed with the content disclosing that is set.

  According to the present solution, when the special winning type is found in the first symbol lottery, an effect (so-called promotion role during big role) is disclosed that discloses shifting to a high probability state during execution of the special game. On the other hand, in the case of a special winning type in the second symbol lottery, the promotion effect during the big role is not executed, and a high probability state is set using the special variation time of the special variation pattern set after the end of the special game. The state disclosure effect of the content disclosing that is executed.

  For this reason, even if it corresponds to the same special winning type, the case where it corresponds to the special winning type in the first symbol lottery and the case where it corresponds to the special winning type in the second symbol lottery, The contents can be changed.

  Here, regarding the second symbol lottery, the profit that the player can enjoy is often set larger than that of the first symbol lottery, and when winning in the second symbol, for example, the maximum profit in the gaming machine is In many cases, the probability of corresponding to the obtained big hit (for example, 14 rounds actual 14 round probability variation big hit) is set high.

  And in the normal state where the time shortening function is not activated, the chance of winning the lottery with the second symbol happens to be obtained, and the result of the winning is obtained. When entering, there is a high possibility that the low probability state is set, and there is a problem that the player's disappointment increases.

  Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a situation, the present solution means that when the special winning type is applied in the second symbol lottery, the state is shifted to a high probability state during execution of the special game. Instead of not performing the disclosed effect (so-called prominent promotion effect), the promoted effect is executed in a special variation state. In this way, by turning the role of the promotion role in the big role to the promotion effect in the special fluctuation state, the ratio of promotion to the probabilistic state in the special fluctuation state can be improved, and as a result, the promotion expectation in the special fluctuation state The degree can be improved. Further, by improving the degree of promotion expectation in the special variation state in this way, the promotion effect executed in the special variation state can be made a valuable (expected) production.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the solution 1 or 2, wherein the first symbol winning type defining means and the second symbol winning type defining means further define at least a common winning type as a plurality of winning types. The variation pattern restricting means corresponds to the common winning type defined by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning. Then, after the end of the special game executed when it is determined, the type of the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern selection means for the special period until the number of variation after the special game reaches a specified number Is limited to the special variation pattern, while the period other than the special period is defined as the type of the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern selection unit. It is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and the common winning type specified by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means is regulated by the basic variation pattern. When the special game is executed by the special game executing means, at the time of executing the internal lottery by the lottery executing means, a low probability state to which at least a normal winning probability is applied is set, or the low probability state is set. A probability state setting means for selectively determining whether to set a high probability state to which a higher probability of winning is applied, and the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the first symbol After the end of the special game executed when it is determined that the winning type is defined as the common winning type defined by the winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means. If the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than the specified number, and the result of non-winning is obtained by the internal lottery, the special fluctuation time of the special fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means is used. A state non-disclosure effect executing means for executing a state non-disclosure effect having contents that are not disclosed whether the low probability state or the high probability state is set by the probability state setting means, and the internal lottery The end of the special game executed when the result corresponds to winning and it is determined that the common winning type specified by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means is determined. When the number of changes after the special game has reached the specified number of times, and the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, the special pattern selected by the change pattern selection means A state disclosure effect executing means for executing a state disclosure effect of the content disclosing whether the low probability state or the high probability state is set by the probability state setting means using a special change time of the change pattern; A gaming machine characterized by further comprising:

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) As a plurality of winning types, at least a common winning type (14 round normal big hit, 14 round probability variation big hit, 14 round probability variation big hit 4) is further defined. Since the common winning type is defined in the first symbol winning type defining means and the second symbol winning type defining means, it is a case where the winning is performed by an internal lottery executed on condition that the first predetermined event has occurred. However, even if a win is made in the internal lottery executed on the condition that the second predetermined event has occurred, there is a room corresponding to the “common winning type”.

(2) After special game executed when the result of internal lottery corresponds to winning and it is determined that it corresponds to the common winning type specified in (1) above, and changes after special game For the special period (special section) until the number of times reaches a specified number (for example, 1 to 4 times), the type of change pattern that can be selected is restricted to “special change pattern”, while for periods other than the special period The type of variation pattern that can be selected is restricted to the “basic variation pattern”. For this reason, the type of variation pattern to be selected differs between the special period and the other periods.

(3) If it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a win and falls under the common win type specified in (1) above, a low probability state or One of the high probability states is set. Which state is set between the low probability state and the high probability state can be determined (differentiated) by, for example, a winning symbol at the time of winning.

(4) When the number of changes after special game is less than the specified number of times (for example, when the number of changes after special game is set to “4”, the number of changes after special game is “1”, “2” or “3”) If the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, it is determined whether the low probability state or the high probability state is set according to (3) above using the special variation time of the special variation pattern. The state non-disclosure effect of the content to be disclosed is executed. For this reason, even if, for example, a high probability state is set according to (3), this is not disclosed (transmitted) to the player. Therefore, in a situation where the number of fluctuations after the special game is less than the prescribed number, the player is intimidated while guessing whether the “low probability state” is set or the “high probability state” is set. The game can proceed with a feeling.

(5) When the number of changes after special game reaches the specified number of times (for example, when the number of changes after special game is “4” if the specified number of times is set to “4”), When the result of non-winning is obtained, the state disclosure effect of the content disclosing whether the low probability state or the high probability state is set according to (3) above is performed using the special variation time of the special variation pattern Is done. For this reason, for example, when the high probability state is set according to the above (3), this is clearly disclosed (transmitted) to the player. Therefore, if it is disclosed that the “high probability state” is disclosed in a situation where the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the specified number, the player can be released from the tension and aim for the next big hit. However, unfortunately, if it is disclosed that it is in a “low probability state”, it will be clear that it has not transitioned to the “high probability state”, but there will be a new change of feeling there and aiming for the next big hit Can do.

  Thus, according to this solution, since the state non-disclosure effect and the state disclosure effect are executed using the period until the specified number of times is reached after the end of the special game, the player's expectation is concentrated there. It is possible to execute the state disclosure effect (probability change promotion effect, probability change winning judge effect).

  Here, the state non-disclosure effect and the state disclosure effect are executed after the end of the jackpot game in the case of the “common winning type”, but the “common winning type” There is room to be selected even when winning in the second symbol. For this reason, the state non-disclosure effect or the state disclosure effect is an effect that is executed regardless of which symbol is won, and is executed when winning in one symbol, but not when winning in the other symbol. Eliminate balance. Therefore, after executing the jackpot game, when executing a probability variation promotion effect such as a state non-disclosure effect, a state disclosure effect, etc., when executing a probability variation promotion effect via the first symbol winning, and via the second symbol winning In this case, it is possible to eliminate the bias in the production reliability (production expectation degree) when the probability variation promotion production is executed.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the game machine according to any one of solutions 1 to 3, wherein after the special game executed by the special game execution means is completed, the number of post-special game fluctuations reaches a specific number. During this period, the second predetermined event can be generated at a higher frequency than the non-time shortened state as a normal state in which the second predetermined event occurs at least at a standard frequency. The time shortening state transition means for shifting to the time shortening state, and when the transition to the time shortening state is made by the time shortening state transition means, the number of fluctuations after the special game has reached the specific number after the end of the special game The gaming machine further comprises non-time-reduced state return means for ending the time-reduced state and returning to the non-time-reduced state on the condition of

The following game contents are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) After the special game is over, the non-time shortening state is shifted to the time shortening state until the number of changes after the special game reaches a specific number of times (for example, 30, 70 times, 10,000 times). Here, the “non-time reduction state” is a state in which the second predetermined event occurs at a standard frequency (normal state), and the “time reduction state” is a frequency that is higher than the non-time reduction state. 2 A state in which a predetermined event can occur.

(2) When the state is shifted to the time reduction state according to the above (1), the time reduction state is ended and the state is returned to the non-time reduction state on condition that the number of fluctuations after the special game has reached a specific number. In addition, when a huge value (for example, 10,000 times) is set with respect to the specific number of times, it is probably very low that the number of fluctuations after the special game reaches the specific number of times.

  According to the present solution, the second predetermined event (occurrence of winning at the lower start winning opening) is an event that is likely to occur in the time reduction state, but is not likely to occur in the non-time reduction state. That is, the lower start winning opening becomes a winning opening that is difficult to generate a winning in the normal state. In such a situation, it is very rare that the second predetermined event occurs in the normal state and the lottery result based on the second predetermined event is won, but the possibility is not zero. Therefore, although it is a thin event, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can flexibly deal with any event by taking effective measures against such an event.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to Solution 4, wherein the first symbol winning type defining means and the second symbol winning type defining means are at least a normal winning type as the common winning type, and A specific winning type is further defined, and the time shortening state transition means determines that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means When it is determined that the winning of the normal winning type or the specific winning type is determined, the non-time shortening state is shifted to the time shortening state, and the probability state setting means, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning And when the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means determines that the current winning category corresponds to the normal winning type, the low probability On the other hand, it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning, and that the winning of the current time corresponds to the specific winning type by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means. In the case of the game machine, the high probability state is set.

The following game contents are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) As a common winning type, at least a normal winning type (14 round normal big hit) and a specific winning type (14 round probable big hit 3, 4) are further defined.
(2) When it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and corresponds to the normal winning type or the specific winning type, the non-time shortening state is shifted to the time shortening state after the special game ends. For this reason, even if it corresponds to any of the above-mentioned (1) normal winning types or specific winning types, the time is shifted to the time reduction state.

(3) If it is determined that the internal lottery result is a win, and it is determined that it is a normal win type, a low probability state is set, while the internal lottery result is a win and a specific win If it is determined that it falls under a category, a high probability state is set. For this reason, it is advantageous for the player that the next hit is closer to the player who corresponds to the winning type belonging to “specific” than the winning type belonging to “normal”.

  According to this solution, the diversity of games is improved by including a “normal winning type” with low profitability and a “special winning type” with high profitability against the “common winning type”. be able to. Then, by executing the above-described state non-disclosure effect and state disclosure effect, even if it falls under the same “common winning type”, until the “state disclosure effect” is executed, It is possible to give the player a sense of tension that it does not know whether it falls under “type” or “specific winning type”.

  Solution 6: In the gaming machine of the present invention, in any one of Solution 1 to 3, the first symbol winning type defining means further defines a special winning type as a plurality of winning types, and the second The symbol winning type defining means further defines the special winning type as a plurality of winning types with a selection ratio higher than the selection ratio of the special winning type defined by the first symbol winning type defining means, The variation pattern restricting means determines that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and that the winning of this time corresponds to the special winning type by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means. When the special game that is executed is completed, the variation pattern selectable by the variation pattern selection means is restricted to the basic variation pattern. It is a game machine for.

The following game contents are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) As the winning type of the first symbol, a special winning type (7 per 14 round probability variation big hit) is further defined.
(2) As for the winning type of the 2nd symbol, the special winning type (7 per 14 round probability variation big hit) is further defined as in the winning type of the 1st symbol. However, the special winning type specified as the winning type of the second symbol is specified with a higher selection ratio than the selection ratio of the special winning type specified as the winning type of the first symbol. For example, the probability that the special winning type is selected at the time of winning in the first symbol is 10%, whereas the probability that the special winning type is selected when winning in the second symbol is 58%.

(3) The type of variation pattern that can be selected is restricted to the basic variation pattern after the end of the special game executed when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and it is determined that it corresponds to the special winning type. The

  According to this solution, when the special game is ended by winning with the special winning type, the type of selectable variation pattern is restricted to the basic variation pattern, and thus the special variation pattern is not selected. For this reason, the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect” executed when the special variation pattern is selected are not executed.

  Therefore, when winning in the special winning type, the player cannot enjoy the tension caused by the execution of the “state non-disclosure effect” or the “state disclosure effect”. However, the fact that the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect” are not executed means that the first symbol or the second symbol can be fluctuated aiming at the next big hit more immediately, and the game efficiency is improved accordingly. Can be made.

  Generally, in the time shortening state, since the symbol variation time is shortened, the time efficiency for the game can be improved accordingly. In addition, since the second predetermined event is likely to occur in the time shortening state, the second symbol is also variably displayed. In this regard, in this solution, the ratio of selecting the special winning type is set higher when the winning result is obtained with the second symbol than when the winning result is obtained with the first symbol. Therefore, with respect to the second symbol, the specific gravity of the role of improving the game efficiency can be increased.

  Solution 7: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the gaming machine according to Solution 6, wherein the time shortening state transition means is such that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the first symbol winning type defining means Alternatively, when it is determined by the second symbol winning type defining means that the current winning corresponds to the special winning type, the non-time shortening state is shifted to the time shortening state, and the probability state setting means If the result of is determined to be winning, and the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means is determined to correspond to the special winning type, the high probability state is set. It is a gaming machine characterized by doing.

  In the gaming machine of the present solution, when it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the win and corresponds to the specific common win type, the non-time reduction state is shifted to the time reduction state, and the high probability state is Is set.

  In the solution means 6 described above, when the special winning type is won, the special variation pattern is not selected after the big hit game ends. For this reason, after the jackpot game is over, the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect” are not executed, and the player can feel a sense of tension due to the execution of the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect”. It is not possible. However, the fact that the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect” are not executed means that the player shifts to a high-probability state and a time-reduced state. You can aim for big hits.

  Solution 8: In the gaming machine of the present invention, in any of Solution 4 to 7, the variation pattern restricting means is that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning in the time shortening state, and the winning The type of the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern selection unit after the end of the special game that is executed when the type determination unit determines that the current winning combination corresponds to the special winning type or the common winning type. The gaming machine is characterized by being restricted to the basic variation pattern.

  According to this solution, when the special game is ended by winning in the special winning type or the common winning type in the time shortening state, the type of selectable variation pattern is restricted to the basic variation pattern. It will not be selected. For this reason, the “state non-disclosure effect”, the “state disclosure effect”, the “high probability state non-disclosure effect”, and the “high probability state disclosure effect” that are executed when the special variation pattern is selected are not executed. .

  Therefore, even if the same common winning type is selected, if the common winning type falls under the non-time shortened state, the special variation pattern is selected and the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect” are executed. However, since the basic variation pattern is selected when the common winning type corresponds to the time reduction state, the “state non-disclosure effect” and the “state disclosure effect” are not executed. In addition, when the special winning type corresponds to the time reduction state, the basic variation pattern is selected, and therefore, the “high probability state non-disclosure effect” and the “high probability state disclosure effect” are not executed. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected depending on the internal state at the time of winning can be varied, and the contents of the production can be varied.

  In addition, if the time reduction state corresponds to “special winning type” or “common winning type”, “state non-disclosure effect”, “state disclosure effect”, “high probability state non-disclosure effect”, “high probability state disclosure effect” ”Is not executed, and therefore, the first fluctuation after the big hit ends is changed to a shortened fluctuation state. Therefore, the first symbol or the second symbol can be changed aiming at the next big hit more immediately, and the game efficiency can be improved accordingly. In addition, if the time reduction state corresponds to “special winning type” or “common winning type”, “state non-disclosure effect”, “state disclosure effect”, “high probability state non-disclosure effect”, “high probability state disclosure effect” ”Will not be executed, so when transitioning to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, execute a winning effect with a probable effect design, a promotion effect with a re-lottery effect, a promotion effect while playing a big role, etc. Thus, the player can be informed of the transition to the high probability state.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible Starring output reliability (effect expectation) to suppress a decrease.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board. It is a figure which shows the structural example and operation example of a movable accessory apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol change start waiting process. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management at the time of a fluctuation time shortening function non-operation (when there is no time saving). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management at the time of a fluctuation | variation time shortening function operation | movement (at the time of time short). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of loss specifically. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an "offset value calculation table." It is a figure which shows the structural example of "the variation pattern table address selection table classified by effect selection offset value". It is the figure which showed the structural example of the fluctuation pattern table according to the kind. It is the figure which showed the structural example of the fluctuation pattern table according to the kind. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the parameter value update process for fluctuation | variation pattern management. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 1st offset value update table. It is the list | wrist which showed the kind of the fluctuation | variation pattern table selected at the time of every fluctuation | variation according to the type of winning symbol corresponding to the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation (when there is no time reduction). It is the list | wrist which showed the kind of fluctuation | variation pattern table selected at the time of every fluctuation | variation according to the kind of winning symbol corresponding to the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation (when there is a short time). It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in a pachinko machine. It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game at the time of winning by symbol as an example (normal state). It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game at the time of winning by symbol as an example (normal state). It is a game flow figure which shows the flow of the game at the time of winning by symbol as an example (time reduction state). It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuation figure showing the flow of reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning). A continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-playing effect executed during a big hit game in the normal state when it corresponds to “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 2” to “14 round probability variable symbol 7” It is. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a heart zone production (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a heart zone production (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a heart zone production (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of a heart zone production (4/4). FIG. 14 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game of “14 rounds probable big hit 7”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production performed at the time of "2 round probability variation 1" winning, and the example of mode change production (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production performed at the time of "2 round probability variation 1" winning, and the example of mode change production (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing the special mode shift production example performed at the time of “2 round probability variation 2” winning. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a mode change production (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a mode transition effect (2/2). It is a figure explaining each mode which appears by mode production. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to “14 round probability variation symbol 7” at the time of winning in the first special symbol lottery in a normal state. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of various productions performed when it wins with the 2nd special symbol in a normal state (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of various productions performed when it wins with the 2nd special symbol in a normal state (2/4). It is a continuation figure showing various example effects performed when winning with the 2nd special symbol in the normal state (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of various productions performed when it wins with the 2nd special symbol in a normal state (4/4). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a background image selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode production management process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall (hall) operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame assembly 2, a glass frame unit 4, a tray unit 6 and a plastic frame assembly 7 (game machine frame) as its main body. Among these, the outer frame assembly 2 is a structure in which wood is combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame assembly 2 uses fasteners such as screws for island facilities (not shown) in the game hall. Are fixed.

  The other glass frame unit 4, tray unit 6, and plastic frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame assembly 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the plastic frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, the glass frame unit 4 and the right edge (back side) of the outer frame assembly 2 are each provided with a locking tool (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame assembly 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of a game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates to open the glass frame unit 4 and the tray unit 6 together with the plastic frame assembly 7. It becomes a state. When these are entirely opened from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the glass frame unit 4 is unlocked while the plastic frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the glass frame unit 4 can be opened. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board 8 is exposed directly, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened, the lock mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 6 is exposed. If the lock mechanism is released in this state, the tray unit 6 can be opened to the front side with respect to the plastic frame assembly 7.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 8 as a game unit. The game board 8 is supported by the plastic frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the glass frame unit 4. The game board 8 can be attached to and detached from the plastic frame assembly 7 with the glass frame unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The glass frame unit 4 has a vertically oval window 4a formed at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the glass frame unit 4 in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the glass frame unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the game board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side as a whole, and an upper dish 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  In addition, an upper dish ball removal lever 6d is installed on the front surface of the tray unit 6 in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal button 6e in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by sliding the upper plate ball removing lever 6d leftward, for example. Further, the player can, for example, push down the lower dish ball removal button 6e to drop the game balls stored in the lower dish 6c downward and discharge them. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises along the left side edge of the game board 8, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill.

[Configuration of the board]
In the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 24, an upper starting winning port 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a variable winning device 30, and the like are installed. The game balls thrown into the game area 8a randomly pass through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, or the normal winning ports 22, 24, the upper starting winning port 26, and the variable starting winning device during operation. Win 28 (enter a ball). The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the winning game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8 through through holes formed in the game board.

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the lower start winning port 28a can be awarded. (Ordinary electric appliance). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right movable pieces 28b, and these movable pieces 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown in the figure, the left and right movable pieces 28b are in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, winning to the lower start winning opening 28a is impossible (a state in which there is no gap through which game balls can flow). ing. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right movable pieces 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width of the lower start winning port 28a is expanded to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can flow in, and generates a win to the lower start winning port 28a. Note that the arrangement (gauge) of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 is basically a mode in which it is easy to guide the flow of the game balls toward the variable start winning device 28, but the game balls are always variable. The inflow does not necessarily flow into the start winning device 28, but the inflow occurs only at random.

  In addition, the above variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning), and can be awarded to a big winning opening (no reference sign). (Special electric equipment, special winning event generation means). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, the winning in the big winning opening is impossible (the big winning opening is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board 8. In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area 8 a including the game balls won in the upper start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  The game board 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, A first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs).

  FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the variation state and stop state of the special symbol by, for example, 7 segment LEDs (with dots), respectively (symbol display means).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, 0 stored number is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 stored number is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning occurs (or various random numbers obtained) every time a game ball flows into the upper start winning opening 26. The display mode changes to a later display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and every time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning, the display mode is decreased by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning occurs every time a game ball flows into the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning port). It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in the upper start winning opening 26 in a state where the first special symbol can start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port) in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of winnings that have not yet started to change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Represents.

  The game state display device 38 includes four LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38c, and a short time state display lamp 38d. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol described above. The operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are attached to the game board 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of the game board: see FIG. 1]
The game board 8 is provided with a production unit 40 from the center position to the right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board 8 by the three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light using, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. As described above, the game board 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40f is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e. At this time, the game ball that has flowed down from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40f easily flows into the upper start winning opening 26 directly below the ball discharge path 40f. Become. In addition, the production unit 40 may be accompanied by a drive source (eg, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) together with a production movable body (eg, a character figure, decoration, etc.). In addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter, the movable body for effect can execute the effect accompanied by the operation of the tangible object. Due to the effects using these movable bodies, it is possible to demonstrate appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images.

  In addition, a light emitting unit 41 for production (for example, a heart-shaped ornament) is attached to the center right portion of the production unit 40. In addition, the light emission part 41 may be a movable body provided with a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.). The effect light emitting unit 41 can execute an effect accompanied by light emission from a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42. Due to the effect using the light emitting unit 41, appeal power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image can be exhibited. A production example using the light emitting unit 41 will be described later.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
In the glass frame unit 4, glass frame top lamps 46 and 48 and glass frame side lamps 50 are installed at a plurality of locations so as to surround the glass unit 8 as components for production. In addition, a tray lamp 52 is installed in the tray unit 6, and the tray lamp 52, the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, and the glass frame side lamp 50 are integrally connected on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 in appearance. Designed as if it were.

  The various lamps 46 to 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like) of built-in LEDs. In addition, a pair of left and right glass frame speakers 54 and a glass frame middle speaker 55 are built in the upper part of the glass frame unit 4, and a saucer speaker 56 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 6 c in the saucer unit 6. Built in. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The player operates the effect switching button 45 to switch the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, during the big hit confirmation display, or during the big hit game It is possible to generate some effects (various notice effects, probable promotion effects, etc.).

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 5).

  The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference sign), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the plastic frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is an interface for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, based on FIG. 4, the structure of the movable accessory apparatus 301 and the movable accessory apparatus 302 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and an operation example of the movable accessory device. 4A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302, and FIG. 4B is an operation of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302. It is a figure which shows an example.

[Configuration of movable accessory device 301]
As shown in FIG. 4A, the movable accessory device 301 is provided with a right shutter portion 310, a right shutter moving mechanism 340 that is a mechanism for moving the right shutter portion 310, and these members. Mounting member 360.
The right shutter unit 310 has a configuration in which a light emitting unit 312 having a right half heart-shaped frame shape is disposed on the surface of a U-shaped transparent substrate 311. A guide portion 315 protrudes upward from the upper portion of the transparent substrate 311. The light emitting unit 312 has a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs and lamps embedded therein.
A guide rail 361 into which the guide portion 315 is slidably (slidably) inserted is provided on the upper portion of the attachment member 360.

The right shutter moving mechanism 340 includes a motor M3 fixed on the back side of the lower portion of the attachment member 360, a motor gear 341 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor M3, and the motor gear 341, and is provided below the attachment member 360. It has an intermediate gear 342 rotatably provided on the provided shaft, and a moving part 343 fixed to the lower part of the attachment member 360.
The moving portion 343 includes a sawtooth-like tooth row portion 344 meshed with the intermediate gear 342, and a guide groove 345 extending through the shaft provided in the mounting member 360 and extending in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower part of the right shutter part 310 is fixed to the upper part of the moving part 343.
Therefore, when the motor M3 is rotationally driven, the rotational force is transmitted to the intermediate gear 342 via the motor gear 341, and the rotational force of the intermediate gear 342 is converted into a lateral force at the tooth row portion 344, The moving unit 343 is moved in the left-right direction.
Accordingly, the right shutter portion 310 fixed to the moving portion 343 moves in the left-right direction along the guide groove 345 and the guide rail 361 according to the rotation direction of the motor M3.

[Configuration of movable accessory device 302]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4A, the movable accessory device 302 includes a left shutter part 320, a left shutter moving mechanism 350 for moving the left shutter part 320, and a member for attaching these members. The movable member device 301 and the common mounting member 360 are members.
The left shutter unit 320 has a configuration in which a light emitting unit 322 having a left half heart-shaped frame shape is disposed on the surface of a transparent substrate 321 having a shape obtained by horizontally inverting the transparent substrate 311. A guide portion 325 protrudes upward from the upper portion of the transparent substrate 321. The guide portion 325 is slidably inserted into a guide rail 361 disposed on the upper portion of the attachment member 360. The light emitting unit 322 has a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs and lamps embedded therein.

The left shutter moving mechanism 350 includes a motor M4 fixed to the back side of the lower portion of the attachment member 360, a motor gear 351 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor M4, and the motor gear 351, and is provided below the attachment member 360. An intermediate gear 352 rotatably provided on the shaft is provided, and a moving portion 353 fixed to the lower portion of the attachment member 360.
The moving part 353 has a sawtooth-shaped tooth row part 354 meshed with the intermediate gear 352, and a guide groove 355 through which a shaft provided in the mounting member 360 is inserted and extends in the left-right direction.

Further, the lower part of the left shutter part 320 is fixed to the upper part of the moving part 353.
Therefore, when the motor M4 is rotationally driven, the rotational force is transmitted to the intermediate gear 352 via the motor gear 351, and the rotational force of the intermediate gear 352 is converted into a lateral force in the tooth row portion 354, The moving unit 353 is moved in the left-right direction.
Accordingly, the left shutter portion 320 fixed to the moving portion 353 moves in the left-right direction along the guide groove 355 and the guide rail 361 according to the rotation direction of the motor M4.

A photo sensor 760 is provided at the lower right end of the mounting member 360, and an index rib 770 that is a detected portion of the photo sensor 760 is provided on the right side surface of the moving unit 343.
The photosensor 760 includes a light irradiation unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light emitted from the light irradiation unit, and the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit are disposed to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Yes.

  The light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit of the photo sensor 760 and the index rib 770 are located between the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit when the moving unit 343 is at the maximum movement position (reference position) in the right direction. It is inserted and it will be in the state which interrupts | blocks the light irradiated from a light irradiation part to a light-receiving part. Therefore, the effect control device 124 determines that the right shutter unit 310 is at the reference position when the photosensor 760 is in the light shielding state (when a detection signal indicating that the light shielding state is received from the photosensor 760). can do.

A photosensor 780 is provided at the lower left end of the mounting member 360, and an index rib 790 that is a detected portion of the photosensor 780 is provided on the left side surface of the moving unit 353. Note that the photosensor 780 is a sensor having the same configuration as the photosensor 760.
The light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit of the photosensor 780 and the index rib 790 are located between the light irradiation unit and the light receiving unit when the moving unit 353 is at the maximum leftward movement position (reference position). It is inserted and it will be in the state which interrupts | blocks the light irradiated from a light irradiation part to a light-receiving part. Therefore, the effect control device 124 determines that the left shutter unit 320 is at the reference position when the photosensor 780 is in the light shielding state (when the detection signal indicating that the light sensor is in the light shielding state is received from the photosensor 780). can do.

[Operation example of the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302]
Here, when the right shutter unit 310 moves to the left and the left shutter unit 320 moves to the right by the rotational drive of the motor M3 and the motor M4, as shown in FIG. Move in the closing direction (the direction approaching each other). When both shutter parts move to the maximum movement position, the light emitting part 312 and the light emitting part 322 are finally combined to form one heart shape.

  The movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302 are driven, for example, in an effect process such as a reach effect, a state non-disclosure effect, or a state disclosure effect, and a change in form due to the movement of the right shutter unit 310 and the left shutter unit 320, The fun of the game can be improved by the combination of the lighting states of the light emitting units 312 and 322.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for determining the big hit, and the generated random number is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. The In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board 8 is provided with an upper start winning port switch 80, a lower start winning port switch 82, and a count switch 84 corresponding to the upper start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, respectively. . Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the upper start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball for the normal winning ports 22, 24 located on the left side of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, a winning of a game ball in the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board surface is detected. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. , Wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals are provided.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed on the game board 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 or the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 and gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 to give various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, and the light emission. Processing for causing the units 41, 312, and 322 to emit light and actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 is performed.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. Note that the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the saucer lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Is done. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 to the glass-frame decoration board 136 is given here, when installing said saucer illumination board, the production switch button 45 is connected to the saucer illumination board. Also good.

  In addition, a panel illumination board 138 is installed on the game board 8, and in addition to the panel lamp 53, various motors M3, M4, light emitting units 41, 312, 322, photo sensors 760, 780 is connected. The various motors M3 and M4 drive the movable accessory devices 301 and 302 via the respective drive mechanisms. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53, the various motors M3 and M4, and the light emitting units 41, 312 and 322 via the panel electric decoration board 138, respectively. On the other hand, output signals from the photosensors 760 and 780 are input to the effect control device 124 (effect control CPU 126) via the panel electric decoration board 138.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board 8 and the display screen through the substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board 8 is visible. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Furthermore, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and individually handles each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data. To drive.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  6 and 7 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 7 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, hit determination random numbers corresponding to ordinary symbols, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) other than jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) are programmed. It is generated above. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 9). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 9). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 75, and its update cycle is faster (eg, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial value of the jackpot determination random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 9). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.

  Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous reset start process (FIG. 6).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the upper starting winning port switch 80, the lower starting winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, and the lower starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 or the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special game management process and a normal game management process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special game management process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special game management process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal game management process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event process (step S204), and in the normal game management process The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently jackpot. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals indicating its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function is activated, variation time reduction function is activated). And store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special game management process (step S205) or the normal game management process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 9). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the lower start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 9).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (lottery element acquisition means). The random value may be acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as random number values related to the variation condition of the first special symbol. Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. To memorize as a set. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is operating the variable time shortening function or whether or not it is a big hit. If the variable time reduction function is not in operation other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the variable time shortening function is in operation or is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit. Also, except during the big hit, when both the working memory of the first special symbol and the working memory of the second special symbol remain, the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) This is because the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated particularly during the operation of the variable time shortening function. In addition, while the fluctuation time shortening function is operating, in addition to shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes high probability (for example, low probability of about 25/251 → about 249/251) In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when it is inactive to about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when it is not in operation). 1.5 seconds), and the number of times of opening increases (for example, when it is not activated, it increases from once to about 2-3 times). As long as there is no interruption over the time period in which the variable start winning device 28 stops operation), even if priority is given to the variation of the second special symbol, the operation memory is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support). However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined (fluctuated) in the order in which the prizes are generated, without providing a priority order. Note that step S36 may be divided into two steps, for example, step S36a for determining that “variable time shortening function is in operation” and step S36b for determining “during big hit”.

  Step S37: If the variable time shortening function is not activated (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 11), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S <b> 42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S44: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76. Acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot decision random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, reach mode random number and variation pattern decision random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the area. It is memorized as a set in the empty section. The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 11) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. Here, it is only determined whether or not the big hit is in the previous step S45a, and the operating state of the variable time reduction function is not determined in the first embodiment in the game other than the big hit as described above. In order to change the second special symbol over the special symbol, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance for the second special symbol regardless of the operating state of the variable time shortening function except during the big hit. This is because it can be used for prefetching. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operating memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command for increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 24 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 10).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 11 and step S46 in FIG. 12) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the upper start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). .

  Step S54: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of loss. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. The variation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects the variation time (or variation pattern number) and determination information regarding the presence or absence of reach variation. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The comparative value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No). Next, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value. That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described deviation pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 12). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information preliminary determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule (No Then, step S64 is executed to set a comparative value for high probability.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 12).

[Special game management processing]
Next, the details of the special game management process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special game management process. The special game management process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change start waiting process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of processing (step S5000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change start waiting process (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation start waiting process has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is processed. If the middle processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display middle processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation start waiting process, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner of 14 rounds of big hit, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is excited for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 14 times). Thus, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of a big hit is referred to as “round”, and if the number of continuous operations is 14 in total, these may be collectively referred to as “14 rounds”. In this embodiment, 14 round jackpots and 2 round jackpots are provided as types of jackpots. For example, 5 round jackpots, 10 round jackpots, 14 round jackpots, but 10 round jackpots are provided. It may be done. Further, for the 14 round big hit and the 2 round big hit, it is assumed that a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided therein. The winning types will be further described later.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the game state (high probability state, time reduced state) after the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag or variation time shortening function operation flag). Let In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state setting means, probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the variable time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, the normal symbol variation time is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. It is extended and the number of times of opening increases. Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the above-mentioned “14 round jackpot” includes, for example, the following as a plurality of winning types. Note that the following winning types are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these, and other winning types may be provided.
(1) “14 rounds of regular hits”
(2) “14 rounds probable big hit 1”
(3) "14 rounds probable big hit 2"
(4) “3 round hits per 14 rounds”
(5) "4 rounds probable big hit 4"
(6) “14 rounds probable big hit 5”
(7) “6 probable big hits for 14 rounds”
(8) “7 round probability big hit 7”
(9) “14 rounds probable big hit 8”

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “14 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “14 round normal symbol”, and “14 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “14 round probability variation jackpot”. Further, “14 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “14 round probability variation symbol 2”, and “14 round probability variation jackpot 3” corresponds to the jackpot of “14 round probability variation jackpot 3”. “14 round probability variation big hit 4” corresponds to the big hit of “14 round probability variation big 4”, and “14 round probability variation big hit 5” corresponds to the big hit of “14 round probability variation big hit 5”. Further, “14 round probability variation big hit 6” corresponds to “14 round probability variation symbol 6” big hit, and “14 round probability variation big hit 7” corresponds to “14 round probability variation big hit 7” big hit. Further, “14 round probability variation big hit 8” corresponds to “14 round probability variation big hit 8” big hit. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[14 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “14 round normal symbol” mode in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the special game state occurs (special game execution means). . This special game is a game composed of a long-term jackpot game (game that is easy to win a winning event) and a short-term jackpot game (game that is difficult to win a winning event), which is a so-called 14-round real 10-game jackpot game.

Specifically, from the first round to the tenth round, the big prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). Here, with regard to the 1st to 10th rounds, when the specified number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) has occurred in the 1st round, the grand prize opening does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. Closed. On the other hand, from the 11th round onward, since short-term opening is repeatedly performed, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, among the big hit games of the “14 round normal symbol”, the 11th to 14th rounds are finished within a short period without giving substantial players (prize balls) to the player. In this “14-round normal symbol” jackpot game, ten rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are substantially given to the player.
And even after the end of the jackpot game, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, by operating the “time reduction function” after the end of the jackpot game, A privilege to shift to the “shortened state” is given to the player.

[14-round probability variation 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “14 round probability variation 1” in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the special game state occurs (special game execution means) ). This special game is a game composed of a long-term jackpot game (game that makes it easy for a winning event to occur) and a short-term jackpot game (a game that makes it difficult for a winning event to occur), and is a so-called 14-round, four-round jackpot game.

  Specifically, from the 1st round to the 4th round, the big prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). Here, with respect to the first to fourth rounds, if the specified number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated in the round, the grand prize opening does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. Closed. On the other hand, since the fifth round and thereafter are repeatedly executed for a short period of time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, among the big hit games of “14 round probability variation 1”, the 5th to 14th rounds are finished within a short period without giving substantial players (prize balls) to the player. The jackpot game of the “14-round probability variation 1” substantially gives four rounds (prize balls) to the player.

  Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “variable time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “variable time reduction function” Is given to the player.

[14-round probability variation 2-7]
In the previous special symbol stop display process, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in any form of “14 round probability variation symbol 2” to “14 round probability variation symbol 7”, it changes from the normal state until then to the special game state. An opportunity to shift occurs (special game execution means). This special game is a game composed of a long-term jackpot game (game that is easy to win a winning event) and a short-term jackpot game (game that is difficult to win a winning event), which is a so-called 14-round real 10-game jackpot game.
Specifically, from the first round to the tenth round, the big prize opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds). Here, with regard to the 1st to 10th rounds, when the specified number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) has occurred in the 1st round, the grand prize opening does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. Closed. On the other hand, from the 11th round onward, since short-term opening is repeatedly performed, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, among the big hit games of “14 round probability variation pattern 2” to “14 round probability variation symbol 7”, the 11th to 14th rounds are short-term without giving substantial players (prize balls) to the player. End in a while. The jackpot game of “14 round probability variation pattern 2” to “14 round probability variation symbol 7” substantially gives 10 rounds of award (prize ball) to the player.

  Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “variable time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “variable time reduction function” Is given to the player.

[14-round probability variation 8]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “14 round probability variation symbol 8” in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs. In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 14th round. The jackpot game of the “14-round probability variation pattern 8” is to give the player 14 balls (prize balls) for 14 rounds. Further, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the big winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “variable time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “variable time reduction function” Is given to the player.

[Difference in the number of times the function for shortening the variation time depends on the winning type]
In this embodiment, the above-mentioned “14 round normal symbol” and “14 round probability variation symbol 1” to “14 round probability variation symbol 8” are largely divided into two by the difference in the number of times the variable time shortening function is activated after the end of the big hit game. Can be divided into groups. That is, one is the first group of “14 round normal symbol” and “14 round probability variation 2”, and the other is the other probability variation symbol, ie “14 round probability variation symbol 1” and “14 round probability variation symbol”. 3 ”to“ 14 round probability variation 8 ”. Among these, in the case of “14 round normal symbol” and “14 round probability variation symbol 2” of the first group, for example, the number of times of operating the variable time shortening function is defined as 30 times. As described above, for the first group, by setting the number of times the variable time shortening function is activated to about 30 times, it is possible to reduce the time without obtaining the next winning in the “low probability state” or “high probability state”. It is possible to realize a game with a sense of tension that the “state” may end. On the other hand, with regard to “14 round probability variation symbol 1” and “14 round probability variation symbol 3” to “14 round probability variation symbol 8” of the second group, the number of times that the variable time shortening function is activated is the same regardless of which symbol is selected. Internally, it is defined as 10,000 times (until the next big hit). As described above, for the second group, by setting a huge number of times of “10000 times” as the number of times of operating the variable time shortening function, the “time shortening state” continues until the next big hit is obtained. Can be guaranteed probabilistically.

[Differences in the number of times the function to shorten the variation time depends on the status at the time of winning]
In addition to the above-described difference in the number of times the variable time shortening function is activated depending on the winning type, the number of times the variable time shortening function is activated may be different depending on the state at the time of winning. For example, when the variable time shortening function is not activated (in a non-time shortened state), the number of times the variable time shortening function is activated is set to be relatively small (for example, 30 times). When winning (in a shortened state), a mode in which a relatively large number of variable time shortening functions are set (for example, 70 times) may be used.

[2 round probability variation 1]
Further, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “2 round probability variation symbol 1” in the previous special symbol stop display processing, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs ( Special game execution means). However, since the two-round jackpot game ends in an extremely short time compared to the 14-round jackpot game, there is almost no winning in the big winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot game of “2 round probability variation 1” is completed within a short period of time without giving substantial play (prize ball) to the player. Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “2-round probability variation 1”, for example, the “probability variation function” is activated after the jackpot game is ended, and as a result, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is provided. It is given to the player. Such “2-round probability variation 1” gives the player the impression that a “high probability state” has suddenly occurred without going through a clear big hit game. However, when it corresponds to "2 round probability variation 1" in a high probability state, you may give together the privilege which transfers to a "time reduction state".

[2 round probability variation 2]
Alternatively, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “2 round probability variation 2” mode in the previous special symbol stop display process, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the short-term jackpot gaming state occurs ( Special game execution means). In this case, the two-round jackpot game is also finished in an extremely short time compared to the 14-round jackpot game, so that almost no winning in the big prize opening occurs. Accordingly, the big hit game of “2 round probability variation 2” is completed within a short period of time without giving substantial play (prize ball) to the player. Instead, if the winning type corresponds to “2 rounds probable variation 2”, for example, by operating both the “probability variation function” and the “variation time shortening function” after the jackpot game ends, A privilege that shifts to the “time reduction state” is given to the player together with a privilege that shifts to the “probability state”. With regard to such “2 round probability variation 2”, the player has the impression that a “high probability state” and a “time reduction state” occurred suddenly without going through a clear big hit game. It will be something to hold. Note that each of the above-mentioned two round probability variation big hits may be a big hit game in which the big hit game is not completed by an extremely short time opening operation, but two rounds of the game are given to the player.

  In any case, if the winning symbol falls under any of the above “14 round probability variation 1” to “14 round probability variation 8”, “2 round probability variation 1” or “2 round probability variation 2”, the jackpot game After the completion, the player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state”. Also, in the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbols at that time are “14 round probability variation 1” to “14 round probability variation 8”, “2 round probability variation 1” or “2 round probability variation 2”. If any of the above is true, the “high probability state” is continued (restarted) even after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the above “14 round normal symbol” is met, the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game is over. Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and it corresponds to “14 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. That is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the previous special symbol stop display processing, the game (variable winning a prize) in the normal probability state or the high probability state. A game in which the device 30 operates is executed (special game execution means). In such a small winning game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins in the big winning opening as in the two-round big winning game. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate and the “variation time shortening function” does not operate, so “high probability state” and “time shortening state” The privilege to transfer to is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached).

[Special symbol variation start waiting process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation start waiting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next special symbol determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9). It will be. When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets a range of the small hit value in the same special symbol hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range ( Lottery execution means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous special symbol hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the small hit flag in the previous special symbol hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 9).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is set to one segment (the center bar “ It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2406: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, first, the main control CPU 72 selects the type of variation pattern table to be used for the special symbol when the deviation varies. The fluctuation pattern table is a data table for determining the current deviation fluctuation pattern number. A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are stored in advance in the table area of the ROM 74, and a plurality of variation pattern numbers are defined in each table (variation pattern defining means). In this process, when the main control CPU 72 selects the type of the variation pattern table used for the current deviation variation, the main control CPU 72 designates the table area address of the ROM 74 corresponding to that type. Then, the main control CPU 72 performs a lottery of reach fluctuation or non-reach fluctuation using the reach determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200, and based on the result, the main control CPU 72 determines the first change based on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern number of the 1 special symbol or the 2nd special symbol is selected.

  The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern number in the special symbol variation time timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. The stop display time at the time of disconnection is set to be constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in advance, but from a plurality of stop display times (for example, 0.5 seconds, 4.0 seconds, 6.0 seconds, etc.) Either one may be selected.

  In the present embodiment, a control method is employed in which a desired variation pattern intended in advance is selected according to the current gaming state and the number of variations. For example, if the current gaming state is “time reduction state” or “high probability state”, a desired variation pattern is selected according to the number of variations when counting after the end of the big hit game, or the number of variations is overlapped As a result, it is possible to select a specific variation pattern triggered by the change in the gaming state (for example, the “time reduction state” ends). Thus, for example, even if the current gaming state is the “time reduction state”, when the number of changes reaches a specific count, a desired change pattern (change time) is selected at the time of losing and a special symbol (for example, the second special state) (Design) can be variably displayed. A control method for selecting such a desired variation pattern will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  The above steps S2404 and S2406 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case of non-winning), but when the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure.

First, the processing at the time of big hit will be described.
Step S2422: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, the above ten types are prepared roughly as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The 10 types of breakdown are as follows: “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 1”, “14 round probability variable symbol 2”, “14 round probability variable symbol 3”, “14 round probability variable symbol 4”, “14 “Round probability variation 5”, “14 round probability variation symbol 6”, “14 round probability variation symbol 7”, “14 round probability variation symbol 8”, and “2 round probability variation symbol 1” and “2 round probability variation symbol 2”. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different in the type of winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the corresponding internal lottery. That is, at the time of the big win of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol, “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variation symbol 2” to “14 round probability variation symbol 8”, “2 round probability variation symbol 1” or “2 round probability variation” One of the symbols “2” is selected. On the other hand, at the time of big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 1”, “14 round probability variable symbol 3”, “14 round probability variable symbol 4”, “14 round probability variable” Either “symbol 7” or “14-round probability variation symbol 8” is selected, and “2-round probability variation symbol 1”, “two-round probability variation symbol 2”, or the like is not selected. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the objects that can be selected as the winning symbol depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (first symbol winning type defining means) shown in FIG. Determine the type of.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “28”, “6”, “8”, “8”, “ “8”, “8”, “4”, “10”, “17”, “3” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 1” to “14 round probability variable symbol 8”, “2 round probability variable symbol 1”, “2” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. A round probability variation 2 "is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of “14 round normal symbol” is 28/100 (= 28%), and the ratio of “14 round probability variable symbol 2” is 100. Six minutes (= 6%). In addition, the ratio that “14 round probability variation 3” is selected is 8/100 (= 8%), and the ratio that “14 round probability variation 4” is selected is 8/100 (= 8%). is there. In addition, the ratio that “14 round probability variation 5” is selected is 8/100 (= 8%), and the ratio that “14 round probability variation 6” is selected is 8/100 (= 8%). is there. In addition, the ratio that “14 round probability variation 7” is selected is 4/100 (= 4%), and the ratio that “14 round probability variation 8” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%). is there. In addition, the ratio that “2 round probability variation 1” is selected is 17/100 (= 17%), and the rate that “2 round probability variation 2” is selected is 3/100 (= 3%). . The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of probability variation symbols for the first special symbol as a whole is 72%.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “02H” to “0AH” in the lower byte respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol and “14 round normal symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H00H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 refers to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (second symbol winning type defining means) shown in FIG. 17 when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol. Determine the type of.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value is “28”, “8”, “1”, “1”. , “4”, “58” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 1” to “14 round probability variable symbol 8”, “2 round probability variable symbol 1”, “ A 2-round probability variation 2 ”is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “14 round normal symbol” is 28/100 (= 28%), and the proportion of selecting “14 round probability variable symbol 1”. Is 8/100 (= 8%). In addition, the ratio that “14 round probability variation 3” is selected is 1/100 (= 1%), and the ratio that “14 round probability variation 4” is selected is 1/100 (= 1%). is there. In addition, the ratio that “14 round probability variation 7” is selected is 4/100 (= 4%), and the ratio that “14 round probability variation 8” is selected is 58/100 (= 58%). is there. Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 72%. However, the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table includes “14 round probability variation symbol 2”, “14 round probability variation symbol 5”, “14 round probability variation symbol 6”, “2 round probability variation symbol 1” and “2 rounds”. The distribution value for “probable variation 2” is not set.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “00H”, “01H”, “03H”, “04H”, “07H”, and “08H” in the lower byte respectively represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “14 round normal symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H00H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol. In the present embodiment, “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 3” and “14 round probability variable symbol 4” are common winning types, and “14 round probability variable symbol 7” is a special winning type.

Note that the selected winning symbols are different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the variable time shortening function is not in operation). The working memory of the symbol is difficult to break. In this embodiment, since the memory for the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol, the winning type for the second special symbol is excluded from “2 rounds probable big hit 1, 2”. In this case, it is difficult to make a “two-round big hit” particularly in the “high probability state”, so that there is an advantage that the player can be less annoyed accordingly. Also, when winning with the second special symbol, the probability of selecting “14 round probability variation 8 ” is set higher than when winning with the first special symbol. There is an advantage that it can be easily acquired.

[Refer to Figure 15: Special symbol variation start wait processing]
Step S2424: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern management parameter value setting table determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a “variation pattern management parameter value setting table” to be used for the current jackpot based on the current gaming state. The “variation pattern management parameter value setting table” specifies the number of times the probability variation function is activated and the number of times the variation time shortening function is activated for each gaming state and for each type of winning symbol, together with “first offset” for each type of winning symbol. It is a data table in which “value (state parameter value)” and “fluctuation pattern selection counter value (frequency parameter value)” are defined in advance. These “first offset value” and “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” select the type of variation pattern table in the variation pattern determination processing at the time of loss (step S2406) by the main control CPU 72 at the time of loss variation after the end of the big hit game. This corresponds to the parameter value (variation pattern management parameter value) required when The “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” will be further described later. The “probability variation function activation count” is the number of variations (upper limit count) of the special symbol that activates the probability variation function after the jackpot game ends as described above, and the “variation time reduction function activation count” is the jackpot game. Is the number of fluctuations (upper limit number) of the special symbol that activates the fluctuation time reduction function.

  Step S2426: The main control CPU 72 determines from the “variation pattern management parameter value setting table” selected in the previous step S2424 “first offset value” and “variation pattern selection counter value” corresponding to the current winning symbol type. , And each parameter value is saved in the parameter area of the RAM 76. The “first offset value” and “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” saved here are newly set in response to the end of the big hit game (setting opportunity), which will be described later. .

  Step S2428: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined. The stop display time at the time of big hit may be common (for example, about 0.5 seconds) with the time of loss or may be longer than the time of loss (for example, about 1.0 second).

  Step S2430: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit and other setting process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2422 is “14 round probability variation symbol 1” to “14 round probability variation symbol 8”, “2 round probability variation symbol 1”. Or, in any of the “2 round probability variation symbols 2”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function activation flag is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag (high probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means, Probability state setting means).

  In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type determined in the previous step S2422 (successful symbol number at the time of big hit) is “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variation symbol 1” to “14 round probability variation symbol 8” or “2”. In the case of one of the “round probability variable symbols 2”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the variable time shortening function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, variable time shortening function Operating means). In the case of a high probability state corresponding to “2-round probability variation 1”, the variation time reduction function operation flag may be set.

  In the process of step S2430, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected. The stop display time at the time of small hitting may be the same as that at the time of disconnection (for example, about 0.5 seconds) or may be longer than the time of disconnection (for example, about 1.0 second).

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When returning from any of the processes in step S2406, step S2409, or step S2430, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2432.

  Step S2432: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit) and stores the value in the command buffer. The variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[Figure 14: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2422 in FIG. 15). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time (stop display time) in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. If the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol change start waiting process (step S2100 in FIG. 15: Yes), the main control The CPU 72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific processing content is as already described in the special symbol variation start waiting process.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation start waiting process (FIG. 15).

[Example of parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management]
FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a “variable time shortening function non-operating variation pattern management parameter value setting table (without time shortening)”. For example, when winning is obtained in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol from the normal gaming state (the probability variation function is not activated and the variation time shortening function is not activated), the “variation time” shown in FIG. In addition to setting the probability variation function activation count and variation time reduction function activation count based on the parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management when the shortening function is not activated (without time reduction), A “first offset value” and a “variation pattern selection counter value”, which are values, are set. This will be specifically described below.

  The parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated (when there is no time reduction) shows the “number of times the probability fluctuation function is activated” according to the type of winning symbol when a big hit (so-called first hit) is made from the normal gaming state. , “Variable time shortening function operation count”, “first offset value”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” are assigned.

[14 rounds when normal symbol is selected]
As shown as “symbol type” in the leftmost column in FIG. 19, when “14 round normal symbol” corresponds to the first hit, it is shown in the top row of the table (excluding the headline column, the same applies below). Various values are selected. As a result, “0” is set as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the end of the big hit game, “30 times” is set as the “number of times the variation time reduction function is activated”, and “parameter value for variation pattern management” is set. The “first offset value” is set to “1”, and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “50”.

[14 rounds probable symbol 1 wins]
When the first hit hits “14 round probability variation 1”, the various values shown in the second row of the table are selected, and “10000 times”, “change” “10000 times” is set as the “time reduction function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “2” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[14 rounds when 2 winning patterns are selected]
When the first hit hits “14 round probability variation 2”, various values shown in the third row of the table are selected. “30 times” is set as the “time shortening function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “4” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “50” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[14 rounds when 3 winning patterns are selected]
When the first hit hits “14 round probability variation 3”, various values shown in the fourth row of the table are selected, and “probability variation function operation count” after the big hit game is ended “10000 times”, “variation” “10000 times” is set as the “time reduction function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “4” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[14 rounds when 4 winning patterns are selected]
When the first hit hits “14 round probability variation 4”, the various values shown in the fifth row of the table are selected, and the “probability variation function operation count” after the big hit game is ended “10000 times” “10000 times” is set as the “time reduction function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “4” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “2” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[At the time of winning 14 rounds probabilistic symbols 5]
When the first hit hits “14 rounds probable variation 5”, various values shown in the sixth row of the table are selected. “10000 times” is set as the “time reduction function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “4” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “3” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[14 rounds probable symbol 6 wins]
When the first hit hits “14 round probability variation 6”, various values shown in the seventh row of the table are selected, and “probability variation function operation frequency” after the big hit game is ended “10000 times”, “variation” “10000 times” is set as the “time reduction function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “4” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “4” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[14 rounds when the winning pattern 7 is selected (first special symbol)]
At the time of the first win, if the first special symbol lottery corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 7”, various values shown in the eighth row of the table are selected, and “the number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the end of the big hit game “10000 times” and “10000 times” as the “variation time shortening function operation count” are set, and “first offset value” is “2” and “variation pattern selection” as the “variation pattern management parameter value”. Counter value "is set to" 0 ".

[14 rounds when 7 winning symbols (2nd special symbol)]
At the time of the first hit, if the second special symbol lottery corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation symbol 7”, various values shown in the ninth row of the table are selected, and “the number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the end of the big hit game “10000 times” and “10000 times” as the “variation time shortening function operation count” are set, and “first offset value” is “4” and “variation pattern selection” as the “variation pattern management parameter value”. “Counter value” is set to “2”.

[When winning 14 rounds of 8 probable variations]
In the case of “14 round probability variation 8” at the time of the first hit, various values shown in the 10th row of the table are selected, and “10000 times”, “variation” as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the big hit game ends. “10000 times” is set as the “time reduction function operation count”, and “first offset value” is “2” and “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0” as “variation pattern management parameter value”. Respectively.

[At the time of winning 2 round probability variation 1]
On the other hand, when “2 round probability variation 1” is met at the time of the first hit, various values shown in the third row from the bottom of the table are selected, and “10000” is set as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the big hit game ends. “0 times” is set as the “number of times” and “variable time shortening function operation count”, and “the first offset value” is “3” as the “variation pattern management parameter value”, and “the variation pattern selection counter value” "Is set to" 20 ", respectively.

[When winning 2 rounds probable variation 2]
In addition, when “2 round probability variation 2” corresponds to the first hit, various values shown in the second row from the bottom of the table are selected, and “10000” as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the big hit game ends. “10000 times” is set as the “number of times” and “variable time shortening function operation count”, and “the first offset value” is “2” as the “variation pattern management parameter value”. "Is set to" 0 ", respectively.

[Small hits]
In addition, when “small hit” is selected, various values shown at the bottom of the table are selected. However, when “small hit” is selected, unlike the case of each big hit, “probability fluctuation” is selected. The “number of function operations”, “variable time shortening function operations” and “first offset value” are not set. That is, the value set before the small hit is maintained as it is. However, “20” is set for the “variation pattern selection counter value”.

  The above example is for the “variable time shortening function non-operating variation pattern management parameter value setting table (without time shortening)”, but the game state at the time of winning is, for example, “time shortening state” Various values are set based on a “variable time management parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management (when time is short)” described below.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of “a parameter value setting table for variation pattern management when the variation time shortening function is activated (when time is short)”. For example, when winning is obtained in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time shortening state (when the variable time shortening function is in operation), the “variation at the time of varying time shortening function operation shown in FIG. In addition to setting the probability variation function activation count and variation time reduction function activation count based on the “pattern management parameter value setting table (when time is short)”, the above “variation pattern management parameter value”. A “first offset value” and a “variation pattern selection counter value” are set. This will be specifically described below.

  In the parameter value setting table for fluctuation pattern management when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated (when there is a time reduction), the “number of times the probability fluctuation function is activated” and “variation time reduction function” according to the type of winning symbol when a big hit is made from the time reduction state The “number of operations”, “first offset value”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” are respectively assigned.

[14 rounds when normal symbol is selected]
As shown in the leftmost column of FIG. 20 as “symbol type”, when the “14 round normal symbol” is met when winning in the time-reduced state, the top row of the table (excluding the headline column. .) Are selected. As a result, “0” is set as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the end of the big hit game, and “70 times” is set as the “number of times the variation time reduction function is activated”, and the “variation pattern management parameter value” is set. The “first offset value” is set to “1”, and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “70”.

[14 rounds probable symbols 1-8 wins]
When winning in the time shortening state, if any of “14 round probability variation symbol 1” to “14 round probability variation symbol 8” is met, various values shown in the second to ninth rows of the table are selected. Specifically, “10000 times” is set as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the end of the big hit game, and “10000 times” is set as the “number of times the variation time reduction function is activated”. , “First offset value” is set to “2”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “0”.

[2-round probability variable design 1 and 2 winning]
On the other hand, when winning in the time shortening state, if any of “2-round probability variation 1” or “2-round probability variation 2” is met, the various values shown in the second and third rows from the bottom of the table are Selected. Specifically, “10000 times” is set as the “number of times the probability variation function is activated” after the end of the big hit game, and “10000 times” is set as the “number of times the variation time reduction function is activated”. , “First offset value” is set to “2”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “0”.

[Small hits]
Also, when the time reduction state corresponds to “small hit”, various values are not selected as shown in the bottom row of the table. That is, the value set before the small hit is maintained as it is. Also for the “variation pattern selection counter value”, the value set before the small hit is maintained as it is.

  In any case, in the present embodiment, when the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” are newly set as the “variation pattern management parameter value”, the main value is based on the combination of these values. A method is employed in which the control CPU 72 performs a calculation and selects the type of variation pattern table at the time of loss. Hereinafter, a method for selecting the type of the variation pattern table using the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” will be described.

[Change pattern determination process at the time of loss]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure of the change pattern determination process at the time of loss executed in the special symbol fluctuation start waiting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 can select the type of the variation pattern table based on the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

[Acquisition of first offset value and counter value for variation pattern selection]
Step S2450: First, the main control CPU 72 obtains the current “first offset value” and “variation pattern selection counter value”, respectively. The various parameter values are stored in, for example, the parameter area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 acquires the current (latest) value from the parameter area. The “current value” means that each of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is an updated value when updated after setting. The update of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” will be described later. Therefore, here, description will be made on the premise of processing after a new setting (for example, the first deviation fluctuation after the end of the big hit game).

[Calculation of second offset value]
Step S2452: Next, the main control CPU 72 calculates a “second offset value” from the acquired values. Here, the “second offset value” is another “variation pattern management parameter value” determined from a combination of the current “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”. The main control CPU 72 refers to the “offset value calculation table” stored in the ROM 76 and corresponds to the “second offset value” from the combination of the current “first offset value” and “variation pattern selection counter value”. Is calculated (acquired). An example of the “offset value calculation table” will be described later.

[Calculation of production selection offset value]
Step S2454: Also, the main control CPU 72 calculates the “effect selection offset value (effect selection parameter value)” by adding the current “first offset value” and the calculated “second offset value”.

[Select variation pattern table]
Step S2456: Then, the main control CPU 72 selects a corresponding variation pattern table type from the calculated “effect selection offset value”. In the present embodiment, for example, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” is calculated as the “effect selection offset value”. As a result, any one of “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, “F”, “G”, and “H” is selected as the type of the corresponding variation pattern table. It has become a thing.

[Selection of reach variation mode]
Step S2458: The main control CPU 72 executes reach variation mode selection processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs a lottery of reach variation or non-reach variation using the reach determination random number as described above. When the reach variation is selected, the reach group (reach type) is further selected and executed using the reach mode random number. The reach group includes, for example, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “story-type reach”, “pseudo-continuous development reach”, and the like. Due to the difference in these reach groups, the length of the fluctuation time and the aspect of the fluctuation effect are different.

  Here, in this embodiment, when “H” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table, for example, compared with the case where “A” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table (normal state), the reach is reached. The probability that the variation is selected is set high (reach generation condition probability high setting means). Therefore, when “H” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table, that is, after the end of the special game or the special game, the reach state is reached until the number of variations reaches a special number (for example, 20 times). Is likely to occur. In this respect, the occurrence of a reach state may correspond to a big hit via the reach state, so if the reach state is likely to occur, the next big hit may be closer ( (Alternatively, the internal state may be a high-probability state). For this reason, after the end of the special game or the special game, it is possible to improve the willingness to continue the game by causing the reach state to appear frequently until the number of changes reaches a special number (for example, 20 times). .

  Step S2460: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the reach variation or the non-reach variation is selected in the previous step S2458, and if the non-reach variation is selected (No), the process proceeds to step S2462, and the reach variation is selected. (Yes) proceeds to step S2468.

[When non-reach variation is selected]
Step S2462: When the non-reach variation is selected, the main control CPU 72 acquires the variation-starting operation memory number for the symbol subject to the current variation (the first special symbol or the second special symbol). Note that even if the variation pattern table corresponds to the same type (for example, the type of “B”), a plurality of variation pattern tables are prepared for each variation start operation memory number (for example, 0 to 4).

[Change pattern selection]
Step S2464: The main control CPU 72 draws a variation pattern at the time of deviation from the variation pattern table corresponding to the type selected at this time using a variation pattern determination random number from the variation pattern table for each number of working memories at variation start (variation). Pattern selection means).

[Change pattern selection when reach change is selected]
On the other hand, when the reach variation is selected (step S2460: Yes), the following procedure is performed.
Step S2468: The main control CPU 72 uses the reach mode random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the first variation pattern table (for example, 0) in the variation pattern table corresponding to the type selected this time according to the number of operation memory at the beginning of variation. A lottery reach fluctuation pattern is drawn.

[Reach fluctuation / non-reach fluctuation common]
Step S2466: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation pattern number setting process. In this process, a variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the previous step S2464 or step S2468 is set. Based on the variation pattern number set here, the value of the variation timer is set and a variation pattern command is generated.

[Example of offset value calculation table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an “offset value calculation table” used for calculating the “second offset value”. In the previous step S2452, the main control CPU 72 uses, for example, the “offset value calculation table” shown in FIG. Can be calculated (obtained).

  As shown in the leftmost column of the “offset value calculation table”, the “first offset value” is any value of “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”. When “0”, “1”, “3”, “4” or “7” is returned as the calculation result in the “second offset value” by the corresponding “variation pattern selection counter value” It is. However, in the present embodiment, when the “first offset value” is “2”, the corresponding “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “0” and does not change, so the “second offset value” is The mechanism is calculated as “0”.

  On the other hand, when the “first offset value” is set to “0”, “1”, “3”, or “4”, the “variation pattern selection counter value” depends on the type of winning symbol as described above. Is set to “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “20”, “50”, “70”, etc., and the corresponding “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “ 1 ”,“ 1-66 ”,“ 2-4 ”,“ 1-20 ”,“ 21-46 ”,“ 47-50 ”,“ 67-70 ” The “2 offset value” is different.

[Role of the first offset value]
Here, in the “first offset value”, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” have a role representing the current gaming state. That is, the initial value “0” represents a normal gaming state, that is, a state in which the probability variation function is not activated and the variation time shortening function is deactivated (no change in certainty, no time reduction). In addition, “1” indicates a state in which the probability variation function is not activated and the variation time shortening function is activated (no change in certainty, there is a short time), and “2” indicates that the probability variation function is activated and the variation time shortening function is activated. It represents the state (with certainty and short time). “3” indicates a state in which the probability variation function is activated and the variation time shortening function is not activated (there is a certain variation and no time reduction), and this state is a “high probability state” in terms of performance. (So-called latent probability variation, during probability variation inherent). “4” is a state in which the probability variation function is activated and the variation time shortening function is in operation (there is a certain variation and there is a short time), and the internal state is the same as “2”. Is not disclosed to the player. The role of the “first offset value” is merely an example in the present embodiment, and other roles can be given.

[Role of variation pattern selection counter value]
The “variation pattern selection counter value” indicates whether the current variation corresponds to a special variation state (a state in which a specific type of variation pattern table is selected) or a non-special variation state (a specific type of variation pattern table is not selected). It has a role to show whether it corresponds to (status). In an example of the present embodiment, especially when the “first offset value” is “1” or “4”, the “variable pattern selection counter value” is “2-4”, “47-50 (normal winning). "Or" 67-70 (winning in short time) "indicates that the first special variation state is met. Further, when the “first offset value” is “4”, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “1”, which corresponds to the second special variation state. Further, when the “first offset value” is “0” or “3”, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “1 to 20”, indicating that it corresponds to the third special variation state. ing. In other cases, it represents a non-special variation state.

Here, the “first special variation state” is executed within four variations at the maximum after the end of the big hit game in the case of “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variation symbol 2-6”, for example. The fluctuation state is a special fluctuation state of either “short special fluctuation state” or “long special fluctuation state”.
The “second special variation state” is a variation state that is executed in the last special variation after the end of the big hit game, for example, in the case of “14 round probability variation symbols 3 to 6”. It becomes a special variation state.
Furthermore, the “third special variation state” means, for example, a special game that is executed up to the 20th variation after the end of a special game or special game in the case of “2-round probability variation 1” or “small hit” Fluctuating state.

[Role of the second offset value]
In addition, the “second offset value” has a role of designating the type of the variation pattern table to be selected in the control according to the current gaming state, whether in the special variation state or the non-special variation state. . In other words, the “second offset value” is added to the “first offset value” to shift (offset) the “first offset value”, thereby changing the calculation result of the “effect selection offset value” as desired. Can be made. Therefore, in the case of the special fluctuation state, it is necessary to select a specific type of fluctuation pattern table on the control. Therefore, the “second offset value” takes a value other than “0”. Since it is not necessary to select a specific type of variation pattern table for control, the “second offset value” is “0”.

[Method for generating special fluctuation states]
Based on the above-described roles of “first offset value”, “variation pattern selection counter value”, and “second offset value”, a technique for generating a special variation state in this embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the first special variation state and the second special variation state are generated when the gaming state is either the “low probability time shortening state” or the “high probability time shortening state”. Therefore, when the “first offset value” is “1” or “4” as described above, the “second offset value” is changed to “0” or other values by the “variation pattern selection counter value”. The first special variation state and the second special variation state are generated by a specific number of variations.

  Further, the third special variation state is generated when the gaming state is either the “low probability non-time shortened state” or the “high probability non-time shortened state”. Therefore, when the “first offset value” is “0” or “3” as described above, the “second offset value” is changed to “0” or other values by the “variation pattern selection counter value”. The third special fluctuation state is generated by a specific number of fluctuations.

[Low probability non-short state]
As indicated by shading in FIG. 22, for example, when the “first offset value” is “0” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1 to 20”, “ The “second offset value” is set to “7” other than “0”. In this case, by adding “7” to “0” of “first offset value”, “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “7”. In other cases, that is, when the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes “0”, the “second offset value” remains “0”, so the “effect selection offset value” is “the first offset”. It is calculated as “0” which is the same as “Value”.

[Low probability, short state]
As indicated by shading in FIG. 22, for example, when “first offset value” is “1”, “variation pattern selection counter value” is “47 to 50 (normal winning)”. When “2” is taken, the “second offset value” is set to “4” other than “0”. In this case, by adding “4” to “1” of “first offset value”, “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. In other cases, that is, when the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes “21 to 46 (normal medium win)” or “1 to 70 (short time medium win)”, the “second offset value” is “0”. The “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “1”, which is the same as the “first offset value”. In the normal win, the “low probability time shortened state” does not continue for more than 30 fluctuations, and therefore the “first offset value” is “1” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “ No value below 20 ".

[High probability non-short state]
Further, as indicated by shading in FIG. 22, for example, when the “first offset value” is “3” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1-20”, The “second offset value” is set to “4” other than “0”. In this case, by adding “4” to “3” of “first offset value”, “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “7”. In other cases, that is, when the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes “0”, the “second offset value” remains “0”, so the “effect selection offset value” is “the first offset”. It is calculated as “3” which is the same as “Value”.

[High probability short-time state]
Similarly, as indicated by shading in FIG. 22, for example, when the “first offset value” is “4” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1”, “2 offset value” is set to “2” other than “0”. In this case, by adding “2” to “4” of “first offset value”, “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “6”.
When the “first offset value” is “4” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “2-4” or “47-50”, both are “second offset values”. "Is set to" 1 "other than" 0 ". In this case, by adding “1” to “4” of “first offset value”, “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. In other cases, that is, when the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes “21 to 46”, the “second offset value” remains “0” and does not change. It is calculated as “4” which is the same as “1 offset value”.

[Selecting a specific type of variation pattern using the production selection offset value]
FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of “change pattern table address selection table by effect selection offset value”. This selection table has a configuration in which, for example, “production selection offset value” is used as an argument, and the address of the variation pattern table to be selected corresponding to this is returned (variation pattern selection type management means).

  In the above-mentioned variation pattern determination process at the time of loss (step S2456 in FIG. 21), the main control CPU 72 refers to the “variation pattern table address selection table by effect selection offset value” shown in FIG. A variation pattern table address corresponding to any of “value” “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, or “7” is acquired. The variation pattern table address acquired here represents the location (first address on the ROM 76) of the variation pattern table to be used in the current variation variation pattern lottery. Accordingly, the main control CPU 72 can search the variation pattern table selected this time based on the obtained variation pattern table address in the subsequent step S2464 or step S2468, and execute the variation pattern lottery described above.

[Direction selection offset value = 0]
For example, when the “effect selection offset value” is “0”, the selection table returns “a special symbol low probability time reduction state change pattern table address” as a result value. As shown in the rightmost column in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “A”, for example.

[Direction selection offset value = 1]
Next, when the “effect selection offset value” is “1”, the selection table returns “special symbol low probability time shortening and state variation pattern table address” as a result value. In the present embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is, for example, “B”.

[Direction selection offset value = 2]
When the “effect selection offset value” is “2”, the selection table returns “special symbol high probability time reduction and state variation pattern table address” as a result value. In this embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “C”, for example.

[Production selection offset value = 3]
When the “effect selection offset value” is “3”, the selection table returns “special symbol high probability time no state variation pattern table address” as a result value. In this embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “D”, for example.

[Production selection offset value = 4]
When the “effect selection offset value” is “4”, the selection table returns “special symbol high probability time reduction and state variation pattern table address” as a result value. In this embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “E”, for example.

[Production selection offset value = 5]
The above variation pattern table types “A” to “E” correspond to the above-described non-special variation state, but in the case of the first special variation state, the “effect selection offset value” is “5”.
That is, when the “effect selection offset value” is “5”, the selection table returns “the special symbol low probability time shortened state or special symbol high probability time shortened state variable pattern table address” as a result value. In the present embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “F”, for example, and this variation pattern table type “F” is selected when it is in the first special variation state.

[Production selection offset value = 6]
In the case of the second special variation state, the “effect selection offset value” is “6”.
That is, when the “effect selection offset value” is “6”, the selection table returns “the special symbol low probability time shortened state or the special symbol high probability time shortened state variable pattern table address” as a result value. In the present embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “G”, for example, and this variation pattern table type “G” is selected when it is in the second special variation state.

[Production selection offset value = 7]
In the case of the third special variation state, the “effect selection offset value” is “7”.
That is, when the “effect selection offset value” is “7”, the selection table returns “special symbol low probability time non-reduction state or special symbol high probability time non-reduction state variation pattern table address” as a result value. In the present embodiment, the type of the variation pattern table selected at this time is “G”, for example, and this variation pattern table type “G” is selected when it is in the third special variation state.

[Configuration example of fluctuation pattern table]
24 and 25 are diagrams showing configuration examples of the variation pattern table for each type. Among these, FIG. 24 shows a configuration example of “variation pattern number selection tables A to E according to the number of working memories at variation start” as the variation pattern table. Further, (I) in FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of “a variation pattern number selection table F for first special variation state effect” as a variation pattern table, and (II) in FIG. 25 shows an example of the configuration of “2 special variation state effect variation pattern number selection table G”. FIG. 25 (III) shows the configuration of “third special variation state effect variation pattern number selection table H” as the variation pattern table. An example is shown. Note that “A to E” and “F to H” here correspond to “A to E” and “F to H” shown in FIG. 23 as the types of the variation pattern table, respectively. Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the variation pattern table of “F to H” for a special period until the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number of times (for example, 4 times or 20 times) after the end of the big hit game or the small hit game, for example. The types of variation patterns that can be selected can be restricted to special variation patterns, and the types of variation patterns that can be selected by referring to the variation pattern table of “AE” for periods other than the special period It can be regulated to a basic variation pattern (non-special variation pattern) (variation pattern regulating means).

[Non-special fluctuation state]
FIG. 24: “Change pattern number selection tables A to E according to the number of operation memories at start of change” are selected in the case of the non-special change state as described above. The selection tables A to E have a structure in which, for example, a “comparison value” and a “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time in order from the head address. Taking the selection table A shown in the figure as an example, the “comparison value” includes values “24”, “49”, “74”, “99”, “124”, “ 149 ”,“ 174 ”,“ 199 ”,“ 224 ”,“ 255 (FFH) ”(all not shown), and“ variation pattern number ”for each“ comparison value ”. “01 (non-reach)” to “10 (non-reach)” are assigned.

  Further, the selection tables A to E define a storage area in which 10 levels of “comparison values” and 10 types of “variation pattern numbers” are defined as a block unit. In the example of the selection table A, for example, the variation pattern numbers “01 (non-reach)” to “10 (non-reach)” of the non-reach group are stored in the first block from the top address. The eye stores the variation pattern numbers “11 (reach mode 1)” to “20 (reach mode 1)” of reach mode 1 along with “comparison values” in 10 stages. Similarly, in the third block, variation pattern numbers “21 (reach mode 2)” to “30 (reach mode 2)” of reach mode 2 are stored together with the “comparison value” in 10 stages. Similarly, the change pattern numbers “31 (reach mode 3)” to “40 (reach mode 3)” and “41 (reach mode) of reach modes 3, 4,... 4) "to" 50 (reach mode 4) ", ... are stored (all are not shown).

  Note that the length of the set variation time differs greatly between the non-reach (normal) variation pattern and the reach variation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 1.5 to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

[Non-reach variation pattern lottery]
The main control CPU 72 compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the first block in the selection table in order in the non-reach variation pattern variation lottery (step S2464 in FIG. 21). If the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the variation pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected. For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “45”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the next comparison value “24” is compared with the first comparison value “24” because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 49 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “02 (non-reach)” as the corresponding variation pattern number (in the case of the selection table A).

[Leach fluctuation pattern lottery]
Further, the main control CPU 72 selects the head address of the corresponding block in the selection table from the acquired reach mode random number in the lost reach fluctuation pattern lottery (step S2468 in FIG. 21). Then, the obtained variation pattern determination random number value is compared with the “comparison value” in the corresponding block in order, and if the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the variation pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected. For example, it is assumed that the acquired reach mode random number corresponds to the second block (reach mode 1), and the variation pattern determination random number at that time is “58”, for example. In this case, since the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “24” in the block, the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value “49” with the random value. Also in this case, since the random value exceeds the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value “74” with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 can select “13 (reach mode 1)” as the corresponding variation pattern number (also in the case of the selection table A).

  In any case, when the variation pattern number is selected from the variation pattern tables A to E, the main control CPU 72 sets the selection result as the present variation pattern number in the special symbol variation pattern number setting process (step S2466 in FIG. 21). . Although not shown here, it is assumed that a variation pattern number (for example, 101 to) different from the above is assigned to the other selection tables B to E.

[First special variation state]
In FIG. 25, (I): On the other hand, the “first special variation state effect variation pattern number selection table F” is selected in the case of the first special variation state as described above. The selection table F also has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each. In the “comparison value”, for example, different values “127” and “255 (FFH)” are provided in two stages, and “51 (short special fluctuation) of“ fluctuation pattern number ”for each“ comparison value ”. “For production”) and “52 (for long special variation production)” are assigned. Therefore, regardless of the non-reach variation or the reach variation, the main control CPU 72 has the obtained variation pattern determination random number value in a single block in the variation pattern lottery (step S2464 or step S2468 in FIG. 21). The comparison is made in order with the “comparison value”, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the variation pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is “50”, the main control CPU 72 determines the corresponding fluctuation pattern number because the random value does not exceed the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “127”. “51 (for short special variation effect)” is selected. Here, the fluctuation time (special fluctuation time) of the short special fluctuation is set to about 15 to 20 seconds, for example, and the fluctuation time (special fluctuation time) of the long special fluctuation is set to about 35 to 40 seconds, for example. ing.

[Second special variation state]
(II) in FIG. 25: The “second special variation state effect variation pattern number selection table G” is selected in the second special variation state as described above. The selection table G also has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each. However, only “255 (FFH)” is provided for “comparison value”, and “52 (for long special variation effect)” of “variation pattern number” is assigned to this. Therefore, regardless of the non-reach variation or the reach variation, the main control CPU 72 has the obtained variation pattern determination random number value in a single block in the variation pattern lottery (step S2464 or step S2468 in FIG. 21). The comparison is made with “comparison value = 255 (FFH)”. If the update range of the random value is, for example, 0 to 249, the main control CPU 72 can select “52 (for long special variation effect)” as the variation pattern number regardless of the variation pattern determination random number. .

[Third special variation state]
In FIG. 25, (III): “Third special variation state effect variation pattern number selection table H” is selected in the third special variation state as described above (special variation pattern). The selection table H is a variation pattern table of a type similar to the selection tables A to F. Similar to the selection tables A to F, the selection table H has a structure in which, for example, a “comparison value” and a “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time starting from the top address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, values “24”, “49”, “74”, “99”, “124”, “149”, “174”, “199”, “224”, “ 255 (FFH) ”(all are not shown), and“ variation pattern number ”“ 601 (non-reach) ”to“ 610 (non-reach) ”for each“ comparison value ”. Assigned. Here, for “601” of “variation pattern number”, a special variation time (for example, about 17 seconds) having a variation time longer than that of the normal “non-reach variation pattern” is set as the variation pattern for the mode-up effect. ing. In this way, by including the variation pattern for the mode transition effect in part of the “variation pattern number selection table H for the third special variation state effect”, the mode transition effect is simply made use of the detachment variation. Instead of executing the above, using a variation pattern for mode transition (for example, a variation pattern that secures a variation time longer than a normal deviation variation pattern in order to execute a mode transition effect that is somewhat firm) It is possible to execute a mode transition effect with a high effect.

  Further, the selection table H defines a storage area in which 10 levels of “comparison values” and 10 types of “variation pattern numbers” are defined as a block unit. For example, the variation pattern numbers “601 (non-reach)” to “610 (non-reach)” of the non-reach group are stored in the first block from the top address, but the tenth “comparison value” is stored in the second block. ”And the variation pattern numbers“ 611 (reach mode 1) ”to“ 620 (reach mode 1) ”of the reach mode 1 are stored. Similarly, in the third block, variation pattern numbers “621 (reach mode 2)” to “630 (reach mode 2)” in reach mode 2 are stored together with “comparison values” in 10 stages, and the fourth and subsequent blocks are stored. Similarly, the change pattern numbers “631 (reach mode 3)” to “640 (reach mode 3)”, “641 (reach mode) of reach modes 3, 4,... 4) "to" 650 (reach mode 4) ", ... are stored (all not shown). In the present embodiment, when the selection table H is selected, the probability that the reach variation (reach mode) is selected is set higher than when the selection table A is selected (normal state), for example. Has been.

  In addition, this selection table H is not only after the end of special game (after 1 game of 2 rounds probable big hit) or after special game (after the end of small game), but at the time of the first win, This table corresponds to “14 rounds probabilistic 2 big hits” and is also referred to when returning to the non-time shortening state after the time shortening state. Therefore, even after returning to the non-time shortened state, it is difficult to determine whether the internal state is a low probability state or a high probability state, so that the gameability can be improved and the selection table H is shared. As a result, the memory capacity of the main control can be reduced.

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. The special symbol stop display in-process is executed in the stop display state after the end of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) each time. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern management parameter value update process to update the “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” and the “first offset value” as appropriate. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2422 in FIG. 15). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is either “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbols 1 to 7”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “14 rounds”. In addition, in the case of corresponding to either “2 round probability variation 1” or “2 round probability variation 2”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “2 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation start waiting process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter value is set in the probability variation count area or the time-short count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. Here, although “number of times cut” is used, the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. As for the “time reduction state”, as described above, a count-down counter value (for example, 30 times, 70 times, or 10000 times) defined for each type of winning symbol is set.

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not each of the probability variation count cut counter value and the short time count cut counter value is 0. At this time, if both the turn-off counter values are already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, if any one of the turn-off counter values is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

  Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-off counter value that is not yet zero. That is, if neither the probability variation count cut counter value or the short time count cut counter value is 0, both are subtracted, and if either one is not 0, the counter value is subtracted.

  Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether any subtraction result is not zero. In the present embodiment, since the probability variation counter value is set at 10000 times, the value hardly becomes 0 stochastically. Therefore, if the value is not 0 (Yes) as a result of the subtraction for the short-time cut-off counter value, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, when the value of the time-short cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. What is reset is the probability variation function activation flag or the variation time shortening function activation flag, but the value of the count-down counter is not substantially zero in the “high probability state” as described above. In practice, the variable time reduction function operation flag is reset. As a result, the time shortening state ends after the special symbol stop display (non-time shortening state return means).

  Step S4655: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a gaming state change flag for the reset count cut function. The “gaming state change flag” means, for example, that a change from “time reduction state” to “non-time reduction state” occurs at the end of the current change.

  Step S4660: Here, the main control CPU 72 executes a parameter value update process for variation pattern management. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 updates the variation pattern management parameter value according to various update triggers (details will be described below). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[Parameter value update processing for fluctuation pattern management]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the parameter value update process for variation pattern management. Hereinafter, the contents of the process will be described according to a procedure example.

  Step S4662: First, the main control CPU 72 acquires various parameter values. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 acquires the current “first offset value” and “variation pattern selection counter value”.

  Step S4664: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the acquired “variation pattern selection counter value” is greater than zero. If the “variation pattern selection counter value” has not yet reached 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4666.

[Update counter value for changing pattern selection]
Step S4666: In this case, the main control CPU 72 decrements the “variation pattern selection counter value” by 1, and updates the result as a new “variation pattern selection counter value”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the “variation pattern management parameter value” is updated with the special symbol stop display (confirmation stop) at the time of loss as an update trigger (management parameter value updating means).

  Step S4668: Next, as a result of the above update, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the “variation pattern selection counter value” has changed from “21 to 20” or “1 to 0”. Check. Specifically, the “variation pattern selection counter value” before the current update is “21” and changes to “20” by the update, or the “variation pattern selection counter value” before the current update is “1”. , And the main control CPU 72 executes step S4670 when it is changed to “0” by the update (Yes). Note that the case where the “variation pattern selection counter value” has changed from “21 to 20” due to short-term wins is excluded.

  Step S4670: In this case, the main control CPU 72 updates the “first offset value” on the assumption that any update trigger has occurred (management parameter value updating means). The updated value varies depending on the update trigger, and details thereof will be described later.

  In contrast, if the updated “variation pattern selection counter value” has not changed to “21” or “0” (step S4668: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S4672. Alternatively, if the “variation pattern selection counter value” has already reached 0 in step S4664 (step S4664: No), the main control CPU 72 similarly proceeds to step S4672. If the “variation pattern selection counter value” has already reached 0 (step S4664: NO), the process may return to the special symbol stop display process without executing step S4672.

Step S4672: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the “gaming state change flag”. In particular, if the “game state change flag” is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process.
On the other hand, when the value (01H) is set in the “gaming state change flag” in the current process (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S4674.

  Step S4674: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the “gaming state change flag” and proceeds to step S4670. Then, the main control CPU 72 updates the “first offset value” on the assumption that another update opportunity has occurred due to the “change in gaming state” (management parameter value updating means). As described above, the updated value varies depending on the update opportunity.

[First offset value update table]
FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the first offset value update table. This update table returns an update result of “first offset value” which is different for each type of update trigger. This will be specifically described below.

[Renewal opportunity (1)-(3)]
In the table of FIG. 28, as shown from the first stage to the third stage excluding the heading stage, for the change pattern selection when the probability fluctuation function of the update opportunity (1) is inactive and the fluctuation time reduction function is finished. When the counter value changes from “21 to 20” or “1 to 0”, the update time (2) variable time shortening function operation ends, the update opportunity (3) probability change function operation ends, Also, the “first offset value” is updated to “0”. However, when the “variation pattern selection counter value” is changed from “21 to 20” due to the short-term win, the update opportunity (1) does not occur.

[Renewal opportunity (4)]
Next, as shown in the fourth row excluding the heading row in the table of FIG. 28, the change pattern selection counter value is displayed when the probability variation function of the update opportunity (4) is activated and when the variation time reduction function is terminated. When the value changes from 21 to 20, the “first offset value” is updated to “3”.

[Renewal opportunity (5)]
Then, as shown in the bottom row of the table of FIG. 28, when the variation pattern selection counter value changes from 1 to 0 while the probability variation function of the update opportunity (5) is activated and the variation time reduction function is activated. The “first offset value” is updated to “2”.

[Variable pattern table selection list by design]
FIG. 29 is a list showing the types of variation pattern tables selected at the time of variation for each type of winning symbol in association with the number of variations (when there is no time reduction). This will be specifically described below.

[14 round normal design]
First, as shown in the first row of the list (except for the heading row, the same applies to the following), if the player wins the “14 round normal symbol” when winning from the normal game state, the end of the jackpot game is set. Various parameter values are set as an opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “50”. In the first variation to the fourth variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes values “50” to “47”. For this reason, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “4” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected from the first variation to the fourth variation after the big hit game ends is “F”, the first special variation state is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. (Short special fluctuation state or long special fluctuation state) can be generated. It should be noted that during the first to fourth fluctuations, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is updated by subtracting one by one with each symbol stop display as an update trigger.

[Variation 5th to 30th variation]
In the fifth variation to the thirty variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes the values “46” to “21”. Therefore, in the fifth to 30th fluctuations, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination with the “first offset value”, and the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “1”. . As a result, “B” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table for the fifth variation to the 30th variation.

[Renewal opportunity (1)]
When the fluctuation of the 30th fluctuation is completed, the “variation pattern selection counter value” changes from 21 to 20, and the above update trigger (1) occurs when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated. "Is updated to" 0 ".

[Variation 31st to 50th variation]
From the 31st change to the 50th change, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes values “20” to “1”. Therefore, in the 31st to 50th fluctuations, the “second offset value” is calculated as “7” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”. "Is calculated as" 7 ". Thereby, “H” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table for the 31st variation to the 50th variation. For this reason, even after the return to the non-time shortened state, the third special variation state can be generated as desired.

[Variation 51st-]
In the 51st variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “0”. Calculated. Thereby, since “A” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the 51st variation, the variation pattern according to the normal gaming state can be selected.

[14-round probability variation 1]
Next, the case of “14 round probability variation 1” will be described.
In the present embodiment, in the case of “14 round probability variation 1”, an effect of disclosing that the state is a clear high-probability state and time-shortening state after the jackpot game is finished is performed. For this reason, it is not necessary to generate a special variation state with a specific number of variations.

  That is, as shown in the second row of the list, when the winning combination is “14 round probability variation 1”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0”. If the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0” from the beginning, the counter value is not subtracted and the value “0” is maintained. In this case, since the “variation pattern selection counter value” does not change, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is only “C” from the first variation after the big hit game to the next winning time.

[14 round probability variation 2]
As shown in the third row of the list, when the winning combination corresponds to “14 round normal symbol 2”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “50”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” takes values of “50” to “47” from the first variation to the fourth variation. For this reason, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “1” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected from the first variation to the fourth variation after the big hit game ends is “F”, the first special variation state is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. (Short special fluctuation state or long special fluctuation state) can be generated. It should be noted that during the first to fourth fluctuations, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is updated by subtracting one by one with each symbol stop display as an update trigger.

[Variation 5th to 30th variation]
In the fifth variation to the thirty variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes the values “46” to “21”. Therefore, in the fifth to 30th fluctuations, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “4”. . Accordingly, “E” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table for the fifth variation to the 30th variation.

[Renewal opportunity (4)]
When the 30th fluctuation is completed, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is changed from 21 to 20, and the update time (4) is generated when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated. "Is updated to" 3 ".

[Variation 31st to 50th variation]
From the 31st change to the 50th change, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes values “20” to “1”. Therefore, in the 31st to 50th changes, the “second offset value” is calculated as “4” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”. "Is calculated as" 7 ". Accordingly, “G” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table for the 31st variation to the 50th variation. For this reason, even after the return to the non-time shortened state, the third special variation state can be generated as desired.

[Variation 51st-]
In the 51st variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “3”. Calculated. Thereby, since “D” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the 51st variation, it is possible to select a variation pattern according to the so-called latent probability variation state.

[14 round probability variation 3]
As shown in the fourth row of the list, when the winning combination is “14 round normal symbol 3”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “1” at the first variation. For this reason, the “second offset value” is calculated as “2” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “6”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation after the big hit game ends is “G”, the second special variation state (long special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. ) Can be generated.

[Renewal opportunity (5)]
When the first fluctuation is finished, the “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” is changed from 1 to 0, and when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the above update opportunity (5) is generated. "Is updated to" 2 ".

[Variation 2nd ~]
In the second variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “2”. Calculated. Thereby, “C” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the second variation.

[14th round probability variation 4]
As shown in the fifth row of the list, when the winning combination is “14 round normal symbol 4”, various parameter values are set with the end of the jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “2”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “2” at the first variation. For this reason, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “1” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation after the big hit game ends is “F”, the first special variation state (short special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. Or a long special variation state).

  In the second variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1”. For this reason, the “second offset value” is calculated as “2” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “6”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the second variation after the big hit game ends is “G”, the second special variation state (long special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. ) Can be generated.

[Renewal opportunity (5)]
When the second fluctuation is finished, the “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” changes from 1 to 0, the above update opportunity (5) occurs, and the “first offset value” is updated to “2”. Is done.

[Variation 3rd ~]
In the third variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “2”. Calculated. Thereby, “C” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the third variation.

[14 rounds probabilistic pattern 5]
As shown in the sixth row of the list, when the winning combination is “14 round normal symbol 5”, various parameter values are set with the end of the jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “3”, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “3” at the first variation, and the “variation pattern selection counter value” at the second variation. "Has a value of" 2 ". For this reason, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “1” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation and the second variation after the big hit game ends is “F”, even if the variation time reduction function is in operation, the first special variation state ( Short special fluctuation state or long special fluctuation state) can be generated.

  In the third variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “1”. For this reason, the “second offset value” is calculated as “2” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “6”. As a result, the type of the variation pattern table selected for the third variation after the end of the big hit game is “G”. Therefore, the second special variation state (long special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. ) Can be generated.

[Renewal opportunity (5)]
When the third fluctuation is finished, the “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” changes from 1 to 0, the above update opportunity (5) occurs, and the “first offset value” is updated to “2”. Is done.

[Fluctuation 4th ~]
In the fourth variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “2”. Calculated. Thereby, “C” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the fourth variation.

[14 round probability variation 6]
As shown in the seventh row of the list, when the winning combination corresponds to “14 round probability variation 6”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “4”, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes the value “4” at the first variation, and the “variation pattern selection counter value” at the second variation. “Takes a value of“ 3 ”, and in the third fluctuation,“ fluctuation pattern selection counter value ”takes a value of“ 2 ”. For this reason, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “1” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. As a result, the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation to the third variation after the end of the big hit game is “F”, so even if the variation time reduction function is in operation, the first special variation state ( Short special fluctuation state or long special fluctuation state) can be generated.

  In the fourth variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “1”. For this reason, the “second offset value” is calculated as “2” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “6”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the fourth variation after the big hit game ends is “G”, the second special variation state (long special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is operating. ) Can be generated.

[Renewal opportunity (5)]
When the fourth variation is completed, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is changed from 1 to 0, the above update opportunity (5) is generated, and the “first offset value” is updated to “2”. Is done.

[Variation 5th ~]
In the fifth variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “2”. Calculated. Thereby, “C” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the fifth variation.

[14-round probability variation 7 (first special symbol)]
In the present embodiment, when “14 round probable variation 7” is met in the first special symbol lottery, since a big role promotion effect is executed during the execution of the big hit game, a clear high probability state and It is supposed to produce an aspect that discloses that the time is shortened. For this reason, it is not necessary to generate a special variation state with a specific number of variations.

  That is, as shown in the 8th row of the list, if the 14th round probability variation symbol 7 is met when winning in the first special symbol lottery, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as the setting opportunity. Is done. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0”. In this case, since the “variation pattern selection counter value” does not change, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is only “C” from the first variation after the big hit game to the next winning time.

[14-round probability variation 7 (second special symbol)]
As shown in the 9th row of the list, when the “14 round normal symbol 7” is met at the time of winning in the second special symbol lottery, various parameter values are set with the end of the big hit game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “2”, and “variation pattern selection counter value” takes a value of “2” at the first variation. For this reason, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “1” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “5”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation after the big hit game ends is “F”, the first special variation state (short special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. Or a long special variation state).

  In the second variation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is “1”. For this reason, the “second offset value” is calculated as “2” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “6”. As a result, since the type of the variation pattern table selected for the second variation after the big hit game ends is “G”, the second special variation state (long special variation state) is desired even when the variation time reduction function is in operation. ) Can be generated.

[Renewal opportunity (5)]
When the second fluctuation is finished, the “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” changes from 1 to 0, the above update opportunity (5) occurs, and the “first offset value” is updated to “2”. Is done.

[Variation 3rd ~]
In the third variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “2”. Calculated. Thereby, “C” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the third variation.

[14-round probability variation 8]
If it falls under “14 rounds probable variation 8”, for example, the winning symbol “7” for which the transition to the high probability state has been confirmed will be won. It is supposed to produce an aspect that discloses that the time is shortened. For this reason, it is not necessary to generate a special variation state with a specific number of variations.

  In other words, as shown in the 10th row of the list, when the winning combination corresponds to “14 round probability variation 8”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0”. In this case, since the “variation pattern selection counter value” does not change, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is only “C” from the first variation after the big hit game to the next winning time.

[2 round probability variation 1]
As shown in the third row from the bottom of the list, when the winning condition is “2 round probability variation 1”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” is “20”, and “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” takes values of “20” to “1” from the first variation to the twenty variation. Therefore, as a result of calculating the “second offset value” as “4” from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “7”. Thereby, the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation to the 20th variation after the big hit game ends is “H”. When the variation for the 20th variation is completed, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is changed from 1 to 0, but the “first offset value” is maintained at “3”.

[Variation 21st ~]
In the 21st variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “3”. Calculated. Thereby, “D” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the 21st variation.

[2 round probability variation 2]
In the present embodiment, in the case of “2 round probability variation 2”, an effect of disclosing that the state is a clear high-probability state and time-shortening state after the jackpot game is finished is performed. For this reason, it is not necessary to generate a special variation state with a specific number of variations.

  That is, as shown in the second column from the bottom of the list, when the winning combination corresponds to “2 round probability variation 2”, various parameter values are set with the end of jackpot game as a setting opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “0”. In this case, since the “variation pattern selection counter value” does not change, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is only “C” from the first variation after the big hit game to the next winning time.

[Small hits]
As shown at the bottom of the list, when “small hit” is met, various parameter values are set with the end of the small hit game set as a trigger. The initial value of “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” is “20”, and “fluctuation pattern selection counter value” takes values of “20” to “1” from the first variation to the twenty variation. Therefore, from the combination with the “first offset value”, the “second offset value” is calculated as “7” in the low probability state, and the “second offset value” is calculated as “4” in the high probability state. As a result, the “production selection offset value” is finally calculated as “7”. Thereby, the type of the variation pattern table selected for the first variation to the 20th variation after the big hit game ends is “H”. When the variation of the 20th variation is completed, the “variation pattern selection counter value” changes from 1 to 0, and the “first offset value” is “0” in the low probability state, and “0” in the high probability state. The state of “3” is maintained.

[Variation 21st ~]
In the 21st variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”. As a result, the “effect selection offset value” is “0” or Calculated as “3”. Thereby, “A” or “D” is selected as the type of the fluctuation pattern table after the 21st fluctuation.

[Variable pattern table selection list by design]
FIG. 30 is a list showing the types of variation pattern tables selected at the time of variation for each type of winning symbol in correspondence with the number of variations (when there is a short time). This will be specifically described below.

[14 round normal design]
First of all, as shown in the first row of the list (excluding the headline row, the same applies to the following), if winning is selected from the time-reduced state and the “14 round normal symbol” is met, the end of the jackpot game is set. Various parameter values are set as an opportunity. The initial value of “variation pattern selection counter value” is “70”. In the first fluctuation to the 70th fluctuation, the “variation pattern selection counter value” takes values of “70” to “1”. For this reason, in the first fluctuation to the 70th fluctuation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination with the “first offset value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is calculated as “1”. The Accordingly, “B” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table for the first variation to the 70th variation. Note that the “variation pattern selection counter value” is updated by subtracting one at a time from the first variation to the 70th variation, with each symbol stop display as an update trigger.

[Renewal opportunity (1)]
When the fluctuation of the 70th fluctuation is completed, the “variation pattern selection counter value” changes from 1 to 0, and when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the above update opportunity (1) occurs. "Is updated to" 0 ".

[Variation 71st ~]
In the 71st variation, the “second offset value” is calculated as “0” from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, so that the “effect selection offset value” is “0”. Calculated. Thereby, since “A” is selected as the type of the variation pattern table after the 71st variation, it is possible to select the variation pattern according to the normal gaming state.

[14 round probability variation 1 etc.]
Even if it falls under any of “14 round probability variation design 1” to “14 round probability variation design 8”, “2 round probability variation design 1” or “2 round probability variation design 2” when winning in the time shortening state After the game is over, an effect of disclosing that the state is a clear high probability state and a time shortening state is performed. For this reason, it is not necessary to generate a special variation state with a specific number of variations.

  Therefore, when one of the above probability variation symbols is met in the time shortening state, the initial value of the “variation pattern selection counter value” is set to “0” with the end of the jackpot game as a setting opportunity. In this case, since the “variation pattern selection counter value” does not change, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is only “C” from the first variation after the big hit game to the next winning time.

[Small hits]
As shown at the bottom of the list, various parameter values are not set when the time reduction state corresponds to “small hit”. Therefore, the current value is maintained as the initial value of the “variation pattern selection counter value”. Therefore, after the small hit, according to the symbol type and “variation pattern selection counter value” at the time of the previous winning, any variation pattern table of “B”, “C”, “F” or “G” is selected. Is selected.

[Summary of variation pattern table selection list by winning symbol type]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the “second offset value” is calculated from the combination of the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value”, and finally the “effect selection offset value” is calculated. Thus, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected for each variation can be specified as desired (as intended in advance).

  In addition, even if the actual game state is different, even if the game state is variously different by building in advance a logic that calculates a common “effect selection offset value” with a specific number of fluctuations A special fluctuation state can be generated at a specific fluctuation number. And by setting the type of variation pattern table selected at the time of occurrence of special variation state to common “F”, “G” or “H”, even in different gaming states, it can be shared by the desired number of variations By executing the effect (special variation state effect) in the above-described manner, it is possible to realize more various gaming properties.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 9) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the short time state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the variation time shortening function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. Note that the probability variation state display lamp 38c is switched to non-display (turned off) even if the probability variation function operation flag is set when the variation display of the special symbol is performed thereafter. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the variable time shortening function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 lights up the LED corresponding to the time-short state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Output a signal.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number command. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the continuous operation number command is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “14 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “14 rounds (14R)”. If the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “2 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “2 rounds (2R)”. If there are no types with different numbers of rounds in the winning symbol (for example, only “14 rounds”), the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b can be excluded from control, and the lighting control can be omitted (or The installation of the lamps 38a and 38b may be omitted.)

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special game management process (FIG. 14). Further, the interval time between rounds is set to, for example, about 2 seconds for the “2 round symbol” and about several seconds (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds) for the “14 round symbol”. In addition, the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is 9 for all winning symbols, for example, but as mentioned above, winnings occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds). Is very rare (not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2422 in FIG. 15). Specifically, if the “14 round symbol” of the large classification is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 14 times. If “2 round symbols” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to two. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program ("1" for 2 times, "13" for 14 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 33) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. It should be noted that since the release timer value is set for a short time for both the first hit and the second round release of the “two-round probability variation symbol” at the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S5310. In most cases, it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has ended before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 33). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a special winning opening closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1-14) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1-14 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (2 times or 14 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5218 in FIG. 33). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process as the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 32). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5401 to S5413. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets a “variation pattern management parameter value” in this process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing.

Step S5505: The main control CPU 72 deletes the continuous operation number command here.
Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2430 in FIG. 15) during the special symbol variation start waiting process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 10 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the variable time shortening function operation flag is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2430 in FIG. 15) during the special symbol variation start waiting process.

  Step S5512: If the value of the variable time shortening function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time shortening (for example, 30 times, 70 times, or 10,000 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of time reductions set here is the upper limit number of times that the variable time reduction function is activated in the subsequent games (to shorten the special symbol fluctuation time). If the value of the variable time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags (probability state setting means). Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the variable time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “time Generates a state specification command indicating "shortening". These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

[Occurrence of setting opportunity]
Step S5515: Also, the main control CPU 72 sets the “variation pattern management parameter value” described above, with the end of the big hit game as a setting opportunity. Specifically, the “first offset value” and the “variation pattern selection counter value” saved in the previous special symbol variation start waiting process (step S2426 in FIG. 15) are respectively acquired and managed in the RAM 76. Set in the parameter area (management parameter value setting means). Thereby, the above-described variation pattern table selection method (FIGS. 29 and 30) can be realized from the first variation after the end of the big hit game.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5516: In any case, after the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 14) in the special game management process to the special symbol change start waiting process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 37 is a diagram for describing a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started on the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal state. The “normal state” is a “non-time shortened state”, and the winning probability of the special symbol is basically a low probability state. However, when the [F6] festival mode is shifted to the [F1] normal state, the winning probability of the special symbol may be in a high probability state. This point will be described later.
[F1] In the normal state, the game proceeds in a plurality of modes including the “normal mode” and the “three sisters mode”.

  [F1] In the normal state, [F2] 14 rounds of normal jackpot or 14 rounds probable jackpot 2 wins, [F3] 14 rounds of jackpot (actually 10 rounds of jackpot) is played, [F4] Heart Zone Rush into. Here, the [F4] heart zone is a chance zone limited to four variations after the end of the big hit game, and a promising promotion effect (probable variation judgment effect) is executed in that zone.

  When the 14 round normal big hit or the 14 round probability change big hit 2 is won, the [F4] heart zone will fail the probability change promotion effect, and [F5] will enter the coast mode. [F5] “Coast mode” is a low-probability and time-reduced state when transitioned to “14 round normal big hit” and transitioned to “14 round probability big hit 2” High probability state and time reduction state. [F5] When a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 26 fluctuations) has elapsed in the “coast mode”, the mode shifts to [F6] festival mode.

  [F6] “Festival mode” is a low-probability and non-time-saving state when transitioned corresponding to “14 round normal jackpot”, and transitioned to “14 round probable jackpot 2” Is a high probability state and a non-time-shortened state. [F6] When a predetermined mode transition opportunity occurs in the “festival mode” (for example, when a mode transition lottery is won), [F1] a transition is made to the “normal mode” or “three sisters mode” in the normal state. In this case, if the winning probability of the special symbol is low, eventually it will be transferred to the “normal mode”, and if the winning probability of the special symbol is high, the “three sisters mode” will eventually occur. To be transferred to.

  Also, in [F1] normal condition, [F7] 14 round round winning big hit 3-6 is won, [F3] 14 round big hit game (substantial 10 round big hit game) is played, [F4] enters the heart zone . When winning 14 to 6 rounds, the [F4] Heart Zone will succeed in probable promotion, and [F8] will enter the fireworks mode. [F8] “Fireworks mode” is a high-probability state and a time-saving state, and its internal state is clearly disclosed to the player.

  [F1] In the normal state, the first special symbol lottery is performed. [F7a] When winning 14 winning rounds in the 14th round, [F3] 14 rounds winning game (actually 10 rounds winning game) is performed, [F7b The promotion effect during the big role is executed, and [F8] fireworks mode is entered. In this case, the [F4] heart zone effect is not performed, and the [F8] fireworks mode is entered directly.

  On the other hand, [F1] The second special symbol lottery happens to be held in the normal state, and [F7a] When winning 14 winning rounds in [F7a], [F3] 14 rounds winning game (actually 10 rounds winning game) is performed, [ F4] Enter the heart zone. In the second special symbol lottery, if the 14 rounds probable big hit 7 is won, the [F4] heart zone will succeed in the probable promotion and [F8] enter the fireworks mode.

  In [F8] fireworks mode, if [F9] 14 rounds probable big hit 1 is won, [F10] 14 rounds big hit game (actually 4 rounds big hit game) is played, and after the big hit game ends, [F4] fireworks mode again It is transferred to.

  [F8] In the fireworks mode, when [F11] 14 round normal big hit is won, [F3] 14 round big hit game (substantial 10 round big hit game) is played and [F5] shore mode is entered. In this case, the [F4] heart zone effect and the [F7b] protagonist promotion effect are not performed, and the [F5] coast mode is entered directly. [F5] When a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 70 fluctuations) has elapsed in the coast mode, [F6] directly enters the “normal mode” in the normal state without passing through the “festival mode”. Transition.

  In [F8] fireworks mode, [F12] 14 rounds probable big hit 3, 4, 7 wins, [F3] 14 rounds big win game (actual 10 round big hit game) is played, [F7b] Once executed, [F8] fireworks mode is entered. In this case, the [F4] heart zone effect is not performed, and the [F8] fireworks mode is entered directly.

  In [F8] fireworks mode, when [F13] 14 rounds probable big hit 8 is won, [F14] 14 rounds big win game (special bonus) is executed and [F8] fireworks mode is entered again.

  On the other hand, in the [F1] normal state, when [F15] 14 rounds probable big hit 8 is won, [F15] 14 rounds big win game (special bonus) is executed, without passing through the heart zone of [F4] [F4] ] Move directly to fireworks mode. [F1] In the normal state, since the second special symbol hardly fluctuates, it is rare that [F1] the 14th round probability variable symbol 1 is won in the normal state, but the 14 round probability variable symbol 1 is temporarily assumed. In the case of winning, [F10] 14 round jackpot game (substantial 4 rounds jackpot game) is performed, and after the jackpot game ends, [F4] fireworks mode is entered.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 38 is a game flow diagram showing, as an example, a game flow when winning by symbol (normal state). FIG. 38 shows a game flow diagram in a case where the normal state corresponds to anything other than “14 round probability variation 7”.

[G1] Normal State For example, when a player starts playing a game with the pachinko machine 1, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a “low probability state” and a “non-time reduction state”. From this state, the game progresses, and after the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and the big hit game is finished, the internal state changes to various states. Examples of the internal state include the following states.
(1) Normal state: “Low probability state” and “Non-time shortened state”
(2) Latency probability variation state: “High probability state” and “Non-time shortened state”
(3) Time-short state: “Low probability state” and “Time reduction state”
(4) Probability state: "High probability state" and "Time reduction state"

  In the example shown in the figure, the game flow at the time of winning from the normal state of (1) is shown, but when the winning result is obtained in any of the above states (2) to (4), However, the transfer destination is the same as in the case of (1) above. However, the number of time savings given depending on the state of the migration source may be different. And here, an example in which a game progresses from the most orthodox [G1] normal state will be described. In this embodiment, in addition to “14 round jackpot”, “2 round jackpot” is also prepared. However, when winning the 2 round jackpot, it is not directly related to the heart zone production, so here the 2 round jackpot The game flow is omitted.

[G2] First Special Symbol Fluctuation An internal lottery (first special symbol lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the upper start winning opening 26. As a result, the first special symbol display device 34 performs variable display of the first special symbol. When the variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery. When the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner, and the game flow returns to [G1] normal state.

[G3] 14 Round Normal Symbol Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 round normal symbol”, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “14 round normal symbol”. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [G4] heart zone.

[G4] Heart Zone When “14 Round Normal Symbols” are met, [G4] Heart Zone Promotional Performance is executed in the Heart Zone, but it is not successful, [G5] Coast Mode move on.

[G5] Coastal mode Corresponding to “14 round normal symbol” [G5] When proceeding to the coastal mode, 26 time reductions remain, so when the variation for 26 times ends in the time shortening state, [G1 ] Return to normal state.

[G6] 14 Round Probability Variation 2 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol is “14 Round Probability Variation 2”, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the form of “14 Round Probability Variation 2” Is done. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [G4] heart zone.

[G4] Heart Zone When “14 Round Probability Change Pattern 2” is met, [G4] Heart Zone Promotion Effect is executed in Heart Zone, but the probability change promotion effect is not successful. [G5] Coast Mode Proceed to

[G5] Coastal mode Corresponding to “14 rounds probable variation 2” [G5] When proceeding to coastal mode, the number of time reductions remains 26 times. G1] Return to the normal state. However, in this case, the winning probability of the special symbol remains in the high probability state [G1] to return to the normal state.

[G7] 14 Round Probability Symbol 3-6 Winning If you win in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol is any of “14 Round Probability Variation 3” to “14 Round Probability Variation 6”, the first special symbol is The display is stopped in a manner representing any one of “14 round probability variation 3” to “14 round probability variation 6”. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [G4] heart zone.

[G4] Heart Zone If any of “14-round probability variation 3” to “14-round probability variation 6” is met, [G4] In the heart zone, a probability variation promotion effect is executed and the probability variation promotion effect is successful. [G8] The process proceeds to the fireworks mode.

[G8] Fireworks mode Regardless of any of “14-round probability variation 3” to “14-round probability variation 6”, the number of time reductions remains nearly 10,000, and the winning probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability state. Therefore, the next hit in the [G8] fireworks mode is guaranteed probabilistically.

[G9] Winning 14 Round Probability Symbol 8 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Symbol 8”, the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the form of “14 Round Probability Variation 8” Is done. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow goes directly to the [G8] fireworks mode without passing through the [G4] heart zone.

[G8] Fireworks mode When it corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 8”, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state. The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

  The above is a game flow when the first special symbol is variably displayed. However, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the game flow is as follows.

[G10] Second Special Symbol Fluctuation An internal lottery (second special symbol lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the lower start winning port 28a. As a result, the second special symbol display device 35 performs variable display of the second special symbol. When the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery. When the result of the internal lottery is not won, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner, and the game flow returns to [G1] normal state.

[G11] 14 Round Normal Symbol Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 round normal symbol”, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “14 round normal symbol”. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [G4] heart zone.

[G4] Heart Zone When “14 Round Normal Symbols” are met, [G4] Heart Zone Promotional Performance is executed in the Heart Zone, but it is not successful, [G5] Coast Mode move on.

[G5] Coastal mode Corresponding to “14 round normal symbol” [G5] When proceeding to the coastal mode, 26 time reductions remain, so when the variation for 26 times ends in the time shortening state, [G1 ] Return to normal state.

[G12] 14-round probability variation symbol 3 and 4 winning If the winning symbol is an internal lottery and the current winning symbol is either “14-round probability variation symbol 3” or “14-round probability variation symbol 4”, the second special symbol is The display is stopped in a manner representing either “14 round probability variation 3” or “14 round probability variation 4”. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [G4] heart zone.

[G4] Heart Zone If either “14 Round Probability Variation 3” or “14 Round Probability Variation 4” is met, [G4] In the Heart Zone, the probability variation promotion effect is executed and the probability variation promotion effect is successful. [G8] The process proceeds to the fireworks mode.

[G8] Fireworks mode Regardless of “14-round probability variation 3” or “14-round probability variation 4”, the number of time reductions remains nearly 10,000, and the winning probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability state. Therefore, the next hit in the [G8] fireworks mode is guaranteed probabilistically.

[G13] 14 Round Probability Symbol 1 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol is “14 Round Probability Changing Symbol 1”, the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the form of “14 Round Probability Changing Symbol 1”. Is done. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow goes directly to the [G8] fireworks mode without passing through the [G4] heart zone.

[G8] Fireworks mode When it falls under “14 round probability variation 1”, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state. The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

[G14] 14 Round Probability Symbol 8 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Symbol 8”, the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped manner in a manner representing “14 Round Probability Variation 8” Is done. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow goes directly to the [G8] fireworks mode without passing through the [G4] heart zone.

[G8] Fireworks mode When it corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 8”, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state. The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the heart zone in which the probability change promotion effect is executed is transferred regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won. For this reason, the heart zone effect is executed when winning with one symbol, but there is no bias in the effect balance that is not executed when winning with the other symbol. Therefore, when performing the probable promotion effect in the heart zone, when performing the heart zone effect via the winning in the first special symbol and the heart zone effect via the winning in the second special symbol In the case of execution, it is possible to reduce the bias in the production reliability (production expectation level).

[Game Flow]
FIG. 39 is a game flow diagram showing, as an example, a game flow when winning by symbol (normal state). FIG. 39 shows a game flow diagram in the case where “14 round probability change 7” corresponds to the normal state.

[G1] Normal State For example, when a player starts playing a game with the pachinko machine 1, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 is in a “low probability state” and a “non-time reduction state”. From this state, the game progresses, and after the winning result is obtained in the internal lottery and the big hit game is finished, the internal state changes to various states.

[G2] First Special Symbol Fluctuation An internal lottery (first special symbol lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the upper start winning opening 26. As a result, the first special symbol display device 34 performs variable display of the first special symbol. When the variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[G20] 14 Round Probability Symbol 7 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Symbol 7”, the first special symbol will be stopped in a manner that represents “14 Round Probability Variation 7” Is done. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is started, and the game flow proceeds to [G22] promotion role during big game.

[G22] Promotion role during big game If the first special symbol lottery corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 7 ”, [G22] Promotion role during big game is executed during the special game, and after 14 rounds Advances to [G8] fireworks mode.

[G8] Fireworks mode When “14 round probability variation 7” is met, the number of time reductions remains 10,000, and the winning probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability state. [G8] Next in fireworks mode Probability of winning is guaranteed.

  On the other hand, when it corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 7” in the second special symbol lottery, the game flow is as follows.

[G10] Second Special Symbol Fluctuation An internal lottery (second special symbol lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the lower start winning port 28a. As a result, the second special symbol display device 35 performs variable display of the second special symbol. When the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery.

[G30] 14 Round Probability Symbol 7 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Symbol 7”, the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a manner representing “14 Round Probability Variation 7” Is done. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is started, and the game flow proceeds to the [G4] heart zone.

[G4] Heart Zone In the case of “14 round probability variation symbol 7”, the probability variation promotion effect is executed in the [G4] heart zone, the probability variation promotion effect is successful, and the process proceeds to [G8] fireworks mode.

[G8] Fireworks mode When it corresponds to “14 rounds probabilistic symbol 7”, the number of time reductions remains nearly 10,000 times, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state, so [G8] Fireworks mode The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the “14th round probability variation symbol 7” in the second symbol lottery is met, it is disclosed that the transition to the high probability state is executed during the execution of the special game (so-called protagonist). The promotion expectation in the heart zone is improved by executing the promotion effect in the heart zone (special variation state) instead of not executing the middle promotion effect). And by raising the promotion expectation degree in the heart zone in this way, the promotion effect in the heart zone can be made a valuable (expectable) effect.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 40 is a game flow diagram showing, as an example, the flow of games at the time of winning for each symbol (time reduction state). Note that FIG. 40 shows a game flow diagram when the various winning symbols are met in the time-saving state.

[H1] Time shortening state For example, when a player starts a game with the pachinko machine 1, it is in a normal state, but from this state, the game proceeds and the winning result is obtained by internal lottery. After the big hit game is finished, the state shifts to a time reduction state such as “low probability time reduction state” or “high probability time reduction state”. In the time shortening state, since the variable start winning device 28 operates at a high frequency, the second special symbol is more likely to fluctuate. However, the first special symbol may also fluctuate. is there. And when the 1st special symbol changes, it becomes the following flows.

[H2] First Special Symbol Fluctuation An internal lottery (first special symbol lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the upper start winning opening 26. As a result, the first special symbol display device 34 performs variable display of the first special symbol. When the variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery. When the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner, and the game flow returns to [H1] time reduction state.

[H3] 14 Round Normal Symbol Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 round normal symbol”, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “14 round normal symbol”. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [H4] coast mode.

[H5] Coastal mode Corresponding to “14 round normal symbol” [H5] When proceeding to coastal mode, since the number of time reductions remains 70 times, when the fluctuation for 70 times ends in the time shortening state, the normal state Return to.

[H5] Winning 14 Round Probability Symbol 2-7 Winning If you win in the internal lottery, and the current winning symbol falls under any of “14 Round Probability Variation 2” to “14 Round Probability Variation 7”, the first special symbol is The display is stopped in a manner representing any one of “14-round probability variation 2” to “14-round probability variation 7”. In this case, a 14-round big hit game is started, and the game flow proceeds to [H6] promotion role during big game.

[H6] Promotion role during the big role If any of “14 round probability variation 2” to “14 round probability variation 7” is met, the promotion role during the special game is executed, and the game flow is [H8]. Proceed to fireworks mode.

[H8] Fireworks mode Regardless of any of “14-round probability variation 2” to “14-round probability variation 7”, the number of time reductions remains 10,000, and the winning probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability state. Therefore, the next hit in the [H8] fireworks mode is guaranteed probabilistically.

[H7] 14 Round Probability Symbol 8 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Symbol 8”, the first special symbol will be stopped in a manner representing “14 Round Probability Variation 8” Is done. In this case, the 14-round big hit game is executed, and the game flow goes directly to the [H8] fireworks mode without passing through the [H4] big role promotion effect.

[H8] Fireworks mode When it corresponds to “14 rounds probabilistic symbol 8”, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000 times, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state. The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

  The above is a game flow when the first special symbol is variably displayed. However, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the game flow is as follows.

[H9] Second Special Symbol Fluctuation An internal lottery (second special symbol lottery) is performed in response to the occurrence of a winning at the lower start winning port 28a. As a result, the second special symbol display device 35 performs variable display of the second special symbol. When the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed according to the result of the internal lottery. If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner, and the game flow returns to the [H1] time reduction state.

[H10] 14-round normal symbol winning When the winning symbol is an internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14-round normal symbol”, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing “14-round normal symbol”. In this case, a 14-round jackpot game is executed, and the game flow proceeds to the [H4] coast mode.

[H4] Coastal mode Corresponding to “14 round normal symbol” [H4] When proceeding to coastal mode, there are 70 time reductions, so when the fluctuation for 70 times ends in the time shortening state, the normal state Return to.

[H11] 14 Round Probability Design 3, 4, 7 Winning Winning in the internal lottery, the current winning design is either “14 Round Probability Design 3”, “14 Round Probability Design 4” or “14 Round Probability Design 7” In the case of the above, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing any one of “14 round probability variation symbol 3”, “14 round probability variation symbol 4”, or “14 round probability variation symbol 7”. In this case, a 14-round big hit game is started, and the game flow proceeds to [H6] promotion role during big game.

[H6] Promotional role during the role of major actor If any of “14-round probability variation 3”, “14-round probability variation symbol 4”, or “14-round probability variation symbol 7” is met, a major role promotion effect will be performed during the execution of the special game. Then, the game flow proceeds to [H8] fireworks mode.

[H8] Fireworks mode Regardless of “14-round probability variation 3”, “14-round probability variation symbol 4” or “14-round probability variation symbol 7”, the number of time reductions remains 10,000 and the probability of winning a special symbol Is set to a high probability state, the next hit in the [H8] fireworks mode is probabilistically guaranteed.

[H12] 14 Round Probability Symbol 1 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Changing Symbol 1”, the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped manner in the form of “14 Round Probability Changing Symbol 1” Is done. In this case, the 14-round big hit game is executed, and the game flow proceeds directly to the [H8] fireworks mode without passing through the [H6] big role promotion effect.

[H8] Fireworks mode When it corresponds to “14 round probability variation 1”, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state. The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

[H13] 14 Round Probability Symbol 8 Winning When winning in the internal lottery and the current winning symbol corresponds to “14 Round Probability Symbol 8”, the second special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a manner representing “14 Round Probability Variation 8” Is done. In this case, the 14-round big hit game is executed, and the game flow proceeds directly to the [H8] fireworks mode without passing through the [H6] big role promotion effect.

[H8] Fireworks mode When it corresponds to “14 rounds probabilistic symbol 8”, the number of time reductions is set to 10,000 times, and the winning probability of special symbols is set to a high probability state. The next hit is probabilistically guaranteed.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when winning in the time shortening state, the heart zone in the special variation state is not entered. For this reason, it becomes a shortened fluctuation state from the first fluctuation after the end of the big hit game, the first symbol or the second symbol can be changed aiming at the next big hit more immediately, and the game efficiency can be improved accordingly. it can.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 selects the type of the fluctuation pattern table using the selection method described above, and performs random number lottery from there to change the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). ) Is displayed in a variety of ways using the first special symbol and the second special symbol (symbol display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is designed, for example, a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “0” to “9”. Among these, for the left effect design, the symbols are arranged in ascending order of “0” to “9”, and for the middle effect design and the right effect design, the numbers are “9” to “0”. ”Are arranged in descending order. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 41 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect image corresponding to the change display and stop display of the special symbol. Here, an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (out). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
41 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state where the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  Also, a marker (reference numerals M1 and M2 in the figure) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In order to facilitate visual discrimination, the markers M1 and M2 are such that the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (◯), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure. In the example of (A) in FIG. 41, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). ) Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is zero.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simply simple colors (for example, “□” figure) with a color, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation. This is to objectively clarify that the result display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “2 round big hit” or “14 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, red display color or green display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
41 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the first special symbol, the change display effect is started by the scroll change of the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (the symbol effect). Execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display). At this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. ing.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the variation time shortening function is not activated and the probability variation function is also deactivated. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
In FIG. 41 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 41, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 41, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number is three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 41 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when an effect symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 41 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. Is called. That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the result display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the big win mode in the result display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

  That is, the numbers “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8”, “9” used in the production symbol. Correspondence relations with “14 round normal symbols”, “14 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7”, and “2 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” are defined in advance in each of the pattern images. In the present embodiment, for example, the following correspondence is provided.

[14 round normal design]
For example, if the winning symbol is “14 round normal symbol 1”, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is basically a combination of three pattern images representing even numbers (including “0”) (for example, “2” − “2” − “2”). However, a combination of three pattern images (for example, “1”-“1”-“1”) representing odd numbers (excluding “7”) at a certain ratio (for example, about 20% to 40%) is selected. Sometimes it is done.

[14 round probabilistic symbols 1-6]
If the winning symbol is any one of “14-round probability variation symbol 1” to “14-round probability variation symbol 6”, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is basically a picture image representing an odd number (excluding “7”). It is selected as a combination of three (for example, “5”-“5”-“5”). However, a combination of three patterns (for example, “4”-“4”-“4”) representing an even number (including “0”) at a certain ratio (for example, about 20% to 40%) is selected. Sometimes it is done.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is difficult to distinguish the winning symbol at the time of big hit on the effect by executing the result display effect using the effect symbol common to the normal symbol and the probability variation symbol. . This makes it difficult to determine the internal state after the jackpot game is over (whether the probability variation function is activated), regardless of whether the production symbols are even-numbered big hits or odd-numbered big hits. Can maintain a sense of tension and expectation of high probability. However, in order to clearly teach that “14 round probability variation 8” is in a high probability state after the end of the big hit game, the display pattern of the production symbol is defined as follows.

[14-round probability variation 8]
That is, when the winning symbol is “14 round probability variable symbol 8”, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is a combination of three pattern images representing an odd number “7” (for example, “7”-“7”-“7” ) Is selected. Thereby, the winning symbol at the time of the big hit can be clearly taught to the player, and a sense of achievement at the time of the probable big hit and a sense of expectation for the high probability state can be strongly held. When the winning symbol is “14 round probability variation symbol 1”, the stop display mode of the effect symbol is not a combination of three effect symbols (for example, “4”-“4”-“4”), but characters. It is good also as a combination (for example, "4"-"special effect design"-"4") of the picture image containing the special effect design comprised from a figure etc.

  In addition, since “2 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2” are originally the winning types to make it difficult for the player to notice the big hit, the stop display mode of the effect symbols in this case is clearly such as three sets of the same symbol For example, it is selected as a serial number (for example, “1”-“3”-“5”) of a picture image representing an odd number (details of the effect example will be described later).

  Further, for each effect design, the display color of the numerical pattern portion is red for “0”, “3”, “5” and “7”, for other “1”, “6” and “9”. By making the color purple, it is possible to impress the player that the expectation of probability change is high. In addition, “2”, “4”, and “8” are colored blue to impress the player that these even-numbered performance symbols are not confirmed with certainty, and there is a possibility of certainty promotion. I can recall that.

  As described above, in this embodiment, “winning” is clearly transmitted to the player through the result display effect using the effect symbol, while “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 1” to “ The winning type of “14 round probable symbol 6” (the type of winning symbol) is not clearly disclosed. This increases the degree of attention to the fluctuating display effect that is performed after the big hit game, and maintains a sense of tension and high expectation for the game. Hereinafter, an example of an effect that makes the winning type undisclosed at the time of a big hit will be described.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 42 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the reach effect executed at the time of a big hit (winning) of “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 2” to “14 round probability variable symbol 7”. Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display based on the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variation symbol 2” to Any form of “14 round probability variation 7” (for example, “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ” etc. of 7-segment LED) ) Until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 42, each effect symbol is simplified and shown only in numbers. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
In FIG. 42 (A): For example, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
42 (B): Next, in a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is positioned in front of the effect symbol that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
42 (C): After the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 42 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped before long. At this point, the effect design representing the number “4” is stopped at the upper left position of the screen, and the effect design representing the number “5” is stopped at the lower left position.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 42 (E): Next to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “4” is stopped at the lower right position, and the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the upper right position of the screen. There are two types of reach states on the diagonal line (on two diagonal lines): the numbers “4” — “fluctuating” — “4” and “5” — “fluctuating” — “5”. On the screen, an image that emphasizes two diagonal lines that are in a reach state on a diagonal line is displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. Furthermore, in this example, since there are two candidates for the medium effect symbol, the numbers “4” and “5” (so-called double reach, double template), it is a highly anticipated reach state. Also, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the degree of expectation of the probability fluctuation jackpot is high (not the probability variation is confirmed), and if the number “4” is aligned, the probability of a normal (non-probability variation) jackpot is increased ( It is not a non-probable change), so that players can have various tensions, such as whether the probability of a probable change is high, the possibility of a non-probable change is high, or just a failure. Can do.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach production, only the production symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, “4” and “5”) are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 42 (F): After a reach state has occurred, for a while, for example, an image representing a “heart” figure forms a group, and a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed that passes diagonally on the screen. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 42 (G): Following the announcement effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also intended to suggest (imply) or remind the player that the number “4” or “5” is a “hit” if it remains unerased to the end. Done in If the number “3” is erased and “4” remains in front of the screen, the “normal (non-probability) big chance of winning” status is reached, but the number “4” is erased and “5”. Is left in front of the screen, it means “a state of high expectation for probability variation jackpot”, and if the number “5” is deleted, it means “out of place”. In this case, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2” and “3”, the player's sense of tension and expectation will also increase. Then, when the production progresses with the number "4" actually being erased on the screen and the number "4" remaining on the screen, the possibility of "normal (non-probable change) big hit" or "probability big hit" Therefore, the player's tension will increase at once.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 42 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it was split into a close-up, and the content that the character emits some dialogue (or silently) (The content may be that of smiling). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 4 ”remains without being erased, the probability of a big hit of“ 4 ”-“ 4 ”-“ 4 ”increases” ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “5 is a big hit with a design with a high probability of probability change”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the probability big hit is likely to be near”.

[Result display effect]
In FIG. 42 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 2” to “14 round probability variable symbol 7”, but the type of winning symbol is not While disclosing, for example, by stopping the display of the effect design representing “5” in the center of the display, this time, it is true that either “normal big hit or probable big hit (big hit that is not sure change fixed)” There is an effect that teaches the player.

  In FIG. 42 (J): Then, for example, the confirmed stop display is performed for the result display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the confirmed stop display of the first special symbol. The effect design fixed stop display is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such confirmation stop display, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed in the production. In other words, it is possible to keep the player undisclosed as to whether it is a probable big hit or a normal (non-probable big hit) by performing an unclear fixed stop display in the production. .

  In the case of “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 2” to “14 round probability variable symbol 7”, the winning type is not disclosed until the end of the big hit game, but “14 round probability variable symbol 8” In such cases, the following production techniques can be employed. In other words, when it corresponds to “14-round probability variation 8” internally, the even-numbered production symbol is stopped and displayed for the time being, and the “7” production symbol is stopped and displayed by the change again and promoted to “probability”. Or, even in the result display effect, an even number of effect symbols are stopped and displayed, and the effect of promoting to “probability change” is performed in the effect during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the normal state, if the first special symbol lottery corresponds to “14 round probability variation symbol 7”, the big role promotion effect that promotes to “probability variation” is performed with the effect during the big hit game (details will be described later) To do).

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying numbers “3” and “6” other than “4” and “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Director during non-disclosure effect (non-disclosure effect); Special game effect execution means]
Next, FIG. 43 shows an example of a big-game effect executed during a big hit game in the normal state when “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 2” to “14 round probability variable symbol 7” is met. FIG. However, “14 round probability variation symbol 7” is limited to the case where “14 round probability variation symbol 7” corresponds to the second special symbol lottery in the normal state.

[At the start of one round]
43 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game (for example, Female character) is displayed. In addition, an effect symbol (here, the number “5”) corresponding to the current winning symbol is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “left eye”) during the big hit game, the “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variation 2” to “14 round” is displayed to the player. Which of the probability variation symbols 7 ”is applicable can be undisclosed to the player.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 43 (B): Thereafter, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to 10 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game. In the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (the numeral “5”) as the “remaining eye” is displayed. Even at this stage, since the “probability promotion effect” is not particularly executed, it is finally possible to impress the player that “no probability change promotion”. Thereby, it is possible to keep undisclosed whether “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variation 2” to “14 round probability variation 7” corresponds to the end of the big hit game. Regarding “14-round normal symbol” or “14-round probability variable symbol 2” to “14-round probability variable symbol 7”, all winning symbols are big hits of 10 rounds of 14 rounds after 10 rounds have ended. A game that is difficult to generate a winning event for four rounds (high-speed opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 30a of the variable winning device 30) is executed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 43 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Enter Heart Zone” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to apparently shift to the “time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends. And even if it actually shifts to the “high probability state” internally, this can be made undisclosed in the production. In the present embodiment, such an effect that does not disclose the internal state after the end of the big hit game is referred to as a “heart zone effect”.

[Examples of heart zone production]
44 to 47 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects of the heart zone effect. This heart zone effect is a state non-disclosure effect and a state disclosure effect (probability promotion effect) that are executed using the first special variation state and the second special variation state.

[Variation 1st time]
In FIG. 44 (A): When the “heart zone effect” is started after the end of the big hit game, for example, the operation memory (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) accumulated so far is consumed, The variable display effect is started. At this point, the background image is changed to an image representing another “heart zone effect”, unlike the “normal mode” described above. In this example, by displaying a background image representing a female character dedicated to the heart zone effect, it is expressed that a special effect state different from the normal mode has been entered.

  In addition, on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen, the movable accessory device 301 and the movable accessory device 302 are moved, so that the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are combined to form one heart shape. By performing the physical presentation by such a movable accessory device together, it is possible to clearly teach the player that “the current state is different from the normal mode”. In this embodiment, the image representing the “heart zone effect” shown in the figure is “when the probability variation function is activated and the variation time shortening function is activated” or “when the probability variation function is not activated and when the variation time reduction function is activated”. It shall correspond to any of the states. As described above, by executing the “heart zone effect” in a mode common to the two game states, the internal state can be made undisclosed to the player. In addition, three effect symbols are variably displayed in a reduced state at the center lower corner position of the screen.

  This “heart zone effect” is executed in the normal state even if it falls under any of “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variable symbol 2” to “14 round probability variable symbol 7”. Although it is a production (however, in the case of winning “14 round probability variation 7”, it is limited to the case through the second special symbol winning). In the following explanation, the winning symbol is “14 round probability variation 4” (in the second variation). An example in the case of shifting to the heart zone when triggered by the fact that the probability variation state is a big hit disclosed) will be described. In this case, since the first fluctuation after the big hit ends is in the first special fluctuation state, either “short special fluctuation state” or “long special fluctuation state” is selected as the fluctuation state. In addition, since the second fluctuation after the big hit ends is in the second special fluctuation state, the “long special fluctuation state” is selected as the fluctuation state.

[Progress of heart zone production]
44 (B): The light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are coupled to each other on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen, so that a heart shape is not only tangibly formed but also a heart shaped region in the liquid crystal screen. (Reference symbol X) will be formed.
At this time, in the heart-shaped region X, an effect is displayed in which three selected objects are displayed. In the illustrated example, three icons imitating a small heart are displayed, and character information of “sorry” or “hit” is displayed in each icon. At this time, character information such as “continuous hit” may be displayed in addition to the character information of “one blow”. However, when the “continuous hitting” icon is selected, the game content for causing the effect switching button 45 to be “continuously hit” thereafter. In addition, such an effect in the heart zone is executed when the result of the internal lottery is not won, but when the result of the internal lottery is won, the reach effect described above is passed. It is also possible to make a big hit or to make a big hit by arranging three production symbols without going through the reach production.

[Progress of heart zone production]
44 (C): The three icons displayed in the heart-shaped area X of the liquid crystal screen begin to rotate, gradually increase in rotational speed, and finally the character information displayed on each icon. The rotational speed increases to such an extent that becomes invisible. At this time, an image of the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the center portion of the liquid crystal screen, and an effect is provided to prompt the player to press the effect switching button 45.

[Progress of heart zone production]
In FIG. 44 (D): When the player performs a push operation of the effect switching button 45, an effect is performed in which the female character grabs any one of the three icons with both hands. In the example shown in the drawing, it is expressed that the icon displaying the character information “sorry” is selected. In addition, if it falls into the heart zone corresponding to “14 rounds probable change 4”, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, it is not disclosed even if the internal state is a high probability state for the first fluctuation The promotion failure effect (state non-disclosure effect) of the content is executed (state non-disclosure effect execution means). In addition, regarding the current variation display, it is assumed that the short special variation state of the first special variation state has been selected. Therefore, no matter what timing the player pushes the effect switching button 45, “ The icon on which the character information “sorry” is displayed is selected. Then, at the central lower corner position of the screen, the three effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a reduced state ("2"-"2"-"7").

[Variation 2nd time]
In FIG. 45, (E): After the big hit game, the second fluctuation is started. In this case, the heart zone continues as it is, and the light emitting unit 312 and the light emitting unit 322 are maintained in a coupled state on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen. It should be noted that the three effect symbols are variably displayed in a reduced state at the center lower corner position of the screen.

  In FIG. 45 (F): In the heart-shaped region X, three icons are displayed again, and character information of “sorry” or “blow” is displayed in each icon.

  In FIG. 45 (G): The three icons displayed in the heart-shaped area X of the liquid crystal screen begin to rotate in the same manner as before, and gradually increase in rotation speed, and finally displayed on each icon. The rotation speed is increased to such an extent that the displayed character information becomes invisible. At this time, an image of the effect switching button 45 is displayed in the center portion of the liquid crystal screen, and an effect is provided to prompt the player to press the effect switching button 45.

[Progress of heart zone production]
In FIG. 45 (H): When the player performs the push operation of the effect switching button 45, an effect is performed in which the female character grabs any one of the three icons. In the example shown in the drawing, it is expressed that the icon displaying the character information of “one blow” is selected. If the winning symbol corresponds to “14 rounds probable variation 4”, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the content is disclosed to disclose that the internal state is a high probability state for the second variation. Since an effect (state disclosure effect) is executed, an icon of “blow” other than “failure” is selected for the icon. As described above, when the icon displaying the character information of “one blow” is selected, the heart zone effect is developed to the next stage. As for the current variation display, the long special variation state of the second special variation state is selected, and the three effect symbols are continuously displayed in a reduced state at the central lower corner position of the screen.

[Heart zone production development]
In FIG. 46, (I): The light-emitting portion 312 and the light-emitting portion 322, which were located on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen, return to their original storage positions, thereby eliminating the heart-shaped region X formed on the liquid crystal screen. Starts full screen production. In the example shown in the figure, an effect in which a male character appears from the right side of the screen is executed.

[Game description (part 1)]
(J) in FIG. 46: Then, an effect is displayed in which the female character and the male character displayed on the liquid crystal screen are gradually enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the center portion of the liquid crystal screen, the text information “Fireworks mode is entered if the heart lamp shines” is displayed. Here, the “fireworks mode” is a mode with a high probability state and a time shortening state, so that the tension of the player can be increased at once by explaining the modes that may be shifted to after that. .

[Game description (part 2)]
In FIG. 46, (K): the effect that the female character and the male character displayed on the liquid crystal screen are further enlarged and displayed is executed. In addition, the text information “Chance once!” Is displayed in the center of the LCD screen. Thereby, it is possible to explain the game that the opportunity switching button 45 is pressed only once.

[Darkness effect]
In FIG. 46 (L): The entire screen is darkened at once, and an image of the “effect switching button” is suddenly displayed in the center of the screen. The image portion of the “effect switching button” is not a dark image but an image that is colored as usual, so that the player's attention can be attracted and the player's sense of tension can be further improved.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 47 (M): When the player performs the push operation of the effect switching button 45, the heart-shaped light-emitting portion 41 enters a light-emitting state as a trigger. In the liquid crystal screen, for example, an effect is performed as if light rays were generated at a stroke from the position of the light emitting unit 41 having a heart shape. By executing the promotion success effect (state disclosure effect) in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction that “successful change promotion effect has been achieved in the heart zone effect”. At this time, when the promotion failure effect is executed, the light emitting unit 41 does not enter the light emitting state, the character information such as “promotion failure” is displayed, and the heart zone effect continues until the fourth change, When the promotion failure effect is executed at the fourth change, the mode is shifted to the “coast mode”.

[State disclosure effect]
(N) in FIG. 47: Then, a state disclosure effect having contents that clearly disclose the internal state is executed (state disclosure effect execution means). In this example, for example, character information “fireworks mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a state disclosure effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “fireworks mode” (high probability state and time reduction state) as the subsequent gaming state. In the middle lower corner position of the screen, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner ("7"-"2"-"5").

[Fireworks mode]
In FIG. 47 (O): For example, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “fireworks mode” state by performing the third variation display after the end of the big hit game. The background image of the fireworks mode is a background image in which a female character appreciates fireworks together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky” to deeply impress the motif of fireworks. In the present embodiment, such a background image is set to “fireworks mode”, and the background image of this “fireworks mode” is displayed so that the current internal state is “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. Is clearly taught (disclosed) to the player. Thereafter, the player will aim for the next big hit with the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” clearly disclosed.

  In addition, although the above example of presentation is an example of presentation when the winning symbol corresponds to “14 round probability variation 4”, “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variation symbol 2”, “14 round probability variation symbol” In the case of “3”, “14-round probability variation pattern 5”, and “14-round probability variation symbol 6”, the following production flow is performed.

[14 round normal symbol or 14 round probability variation 2]
In the first fluctuation to the fourth fluctuation, either “Short Special Fluctuation State” or “Long Special Fluctuation State” is selected, but the probable change promotion effect is not successful (only promotion failure effect is executed) From the fifth fluctuation, enter the “coast mode”.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the state is disclosed in a manner that suggests that a high probability state is not set, regardless of whether it is a “14 round normal symbol” or “14 round probability variation 2”. The production is to be executed. For this reason, even if it is a case where it enters into the "coast mode" without succeeding in a probable promotion effect, it will not be decided that the low probability state is set at that time. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a player's expectation while leaving room for the possibility that a high probability state is set even in the subsequent state.

[14 round normal design 3]
In the first variation, “long special variation state” is selected, and the probable change promotion effect is successful, and the “fireworks mode” is entered from the second variation.

[14 round normal design 5]
In the first variation and the second variation, either “short special variation state” or “long special variation state” is selected, but the probability variation promotion effect is not successful. Then, the “long special variation state” is selected at the third variation, and the probability variation promotion effect is successful, and the “fireworks mode” is entered from the fourth variation.

[14 round normal design 6]
In the first variation to the third variation, either “short special variation state” or “long special variation state” is selected, but the probability variation promotion effect is not successful. Then, the “long special variation state” is selected at the fourth variation, and the probability variation promotion effect is successful, and the “fireworks mode” is entered from the fifth variation.

[Gameability using special variation state effects]
By executing the “heart zone effect” after the end of the big hit game in the above flow, the following gaming characteristics can be realized in the present embodiment.

(1) During the “heart zone production”, after the big hit game, the game mountain range of “Heart zone continuation or fireworks mode promotion” can be generated up to the fourth variation. In particular, in the present embodiment, the special variation state effect can be executed by linking with the control by the main control CPU 72 (displacement variation pattern determination process), so that the desired effect is systematically and systematically on the control, not just accidentally. It is possible to generate a game with a sense of stability.

(2) Also, at which timing during the “Heart Zone Effect”, the probability change promotion effect (state disclosure effect) is determined in advance according to the winning symbol at the time of the big hit, so here also systematically in terms of control A desired production flow can be generated, and orderly and stable gaming can be provided. In addition, by distributing the timing at which the “probability promotion effect” is executed according to the winning symbol of the special symbol, it is possible to improve the diversity of games and the timing of state disclosure.

(3) Furthermore, since the “heart zone effect” is executed only after the end of the big hit game, the game is limited to the fourth change, so if the probability change promotion effect (state disclosure effect) is not executed by the fourth change, the game It is possible to provide a simple and easy-to-understand gameability that “the expectation of probability change is low” to the player.

(4) However, even if the probability change promotion effect is not executed in the “heart zone effect”, a winning symbol that has shifted to a high probability state is also prepared (14 round probability change symbol 2). Even so, it is possible to maintain a moderate tension such as “I can't be careful until the end”. Thereby, the monotonization of the game can be prevented, and a decrease in game motivation when the probability variation promotion effect is not executed in the “heart zone effect” can be suppressed.

[Director-in-chief production (special game production)]
FIG. 48 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game of “14 rounds probable big hit 7”. This big role production is executed when the effect design is stopped and displayed in a combination of three of “7”-“7”-“7” through the reach production.

[1 round]
In FIG. 48 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game is being executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect design (here, the number “7”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In the lower left area of the display screen, the characters “Special Bonus” are displayed. Therefore, the player can be informed that the current big hit is a special big hit different from the normal big hit.

[14 rounds]
In FIG. 48 (B): After that, when the jackpot game is proceeding smoothly and the final 14 rounds are reached, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND14” is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. In the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 48 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “fireworks mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “fireworks mode” (high probability state and time reduction state) as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, if the player wins “14 rounds probable big hit 7”, the player can not feel the tension from moving to the “heart zone”, but it is highly probable that the player will not move to the “heart zone”. This means that the player shifts to the “fireworks mode”, which is a state and a time-saving state, so that the player can aim for the next big hit at ease at that time.

[Example of production when winning 2 round probabilistic symbols 1]
49 and 50 are continuous diagrams showing an example of effects and an example of mode transition effects that are executed when “2-round probability variation 1” is won. However, in this example, the 2-round probability variable symbol 1 winning when the internal state is a high probability state is excluded. In the case of the 2-round probability variable symbol 1 winning in the case where the internal state is a high probability state, another effect example is given (details will be described later).

  This effect example represents an example of a variable display effect and a result display effect (stop display effect) using an effect symbol. Among these, the variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from when the special symbol starts variable display to when it is stopped and displayed (including fixed stop). The result display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Furthermore, the mode transition effect is an effect for making it difficult to understand the internal state. In addition, in the following description, about the matter which is common with the example of an effect at the time of 14 rounds big hit winning mentioned above, the description is omitted suitably.

[Before starting variable display production]
In FIG. 49A, three lines of effect symbols are displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The effect design is stopped and displayed with a combination of numbers “4”-“6”-“7”.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 49 (B): The variable display effect is started when the three symbol rows scroll and change on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Left design stop]
FIG. 49 (C): The left effect symbol representing the number “1” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Right production symbol stop]
FIG. 49 (D): The right effect design representing the number “5” stops at the middle position of the screen.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 49 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed as an outlier symbol, the result symbol is also displayed in the same manner as the effect symbol, but here the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the “two-round probability variable symbol 1” mode. In spite of this, the stop display effect is performed in the same manner (or approximate) as the outage on the effect. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the effect design representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, since the combination of the production symbols is “1”-“3”-“5”, the change is not a conspicuous winning, and there is no particular difference from the normal “out of”. It is expressed in. However, if a stop eye (chance eye) in which odd symbols are arranged in order from the left effect symbol as in this example is displayed, the player is instructed (suggested) that there may be some hits in some cases can do. As a result, it is possible to remind the player that there is a possibility that the player has shifted to the “hidden probability change (latency probability change)” state in subsequent games, and to suppress a decrease in game motivation. In this example, odd-numbered symbols are arranged in order, but this is a mode in which a stop display effect is performed at a particular irregularity (for example, “8”-“2”-“3”). May be. Moreover, the effect of the aspect which makes it a big hit by stopping and displaying at least one special effect symbol which consists of a character, a figure, etc. instead of a numerical effect symbol may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, yellow display color) corresponding to “2 round big hit”. This is to objectively clarify that the result display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally.

[Example of mode transition effect]
At the time of the big hit of the 2-round probability variable symbol 1, the mode transition effect is executed. This mode transition effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the above-mentioned “2 round probability variation 1” big hit occurs.

(Door closing effect)
FIG. 50 (F): For example, if the background image up to that time is the “normal mode” shown in FIG. 49 (B), the doors from both sides of the display screen are hit during the second round of big hit (during special game execution). (襖) appears and a stunning closing effect is performed in the center. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by temporarily covering the display screen so far.

(Door opening production)
In FIG. 50 (G): Next, the closed door quickly moves to the left and right of the display screen, and an effect (door opening effect) representing the operation of opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[Mode transition (background change) production]
In FIG. 50 (H): When the door is opened, the background image changes to a mode representing “festival mode” together with, for example, character information “Festival mode entry!”. The background image of “Festival Mode” is a background image with motifs of images such as “Taiko”, “Lantern”, and “Uchiwa” to deeply impress the festival. By executing such a mode transition effect, it is possible to visually appeal to the player that the mode has shifted to a different mode on the effect, thereby recalling the possibility of a “high probability state” The motivation to continue the game can be maintained until the next winning is obtained (toward the next winning). Note that even when hitting a small hit, the player enters the “festival mode”, but the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, purple display color) corresponding to the “small hit”.

[Festival mode production]
In FIG. 50, (I): Following the mode transition effect, the variable display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol variable display. The background image at this time has already been switched to the “festival mode” mode. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the door is performed, and the player is informed that the transition from the “normal mode” to the “festival mode” has been made. In addition, although the pattern which transfers from "normal mode" to "festival mode" is mentioned as an example here, when changing to other modes (stages), the flow is the same.
And the fluctuation | variation by a 1st special symbol is started by consuming the working memory of the following 1st special symbol. In the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Here, in this embodiment, when it corresponds to “2 round probability variation 1” or “small hit”, the mode transition effect is frequently executed thereafter (mode transition effect of Details will be described later).

[Example of transition to special mode executed when winning 2 round probabilistic symbols 2]
FIG. 51 is a continuous diagram showing a special mode transition effect example executed when “2 round probability variation 2” is won. In addition, since the example of the effect design performed at the time of winning the 2-round probability variation symbol 2 is the same effect as FIG. 49, this figure will explain the special mode transition effect executed after (E) in FIG. . Moreover, when it corresponds to the 2-round probability variation symbol 1 in the high probability state or the time shortening state, the same effect example as described below is obtained.

[Special mode transition effect example]
When two-round probability variation symbol 2 is won, a special mode transition effect is executed. This special mode transition effect is executed, for example, at the timing when the above-mentioned “2 round probability variation 2” big hit occurs.

(Door closing effect)
FIG. 51 (F): For example, if the background image so far is the “normal mode” shown in FIG. 49 (B) or the “festival mode” shown in FIG. A door (（) appears from both sides of the display screen in the middle (during the execution of a special game), and the effect of closing in the middle is performed. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by temporarily covering the display screen so far.

(Door opening production)
In FIG. 51 (G): Next, the closed door quickly moves to the left and right of the display screen, and an effect (door opening effect) representing the operation of opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[Mode transition (background change) production]
In FIG. 51 (H): When the door is opened, for example, a background image corresponding to the “high probability state” is displayed on the full screen. In this example, for example, a scene in which a female character is looking up at fireworks is produced along with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”, and character information “Fireworks mode has entered!” Is displayed.

[Direction in high probability state]
In FIG. 51 (I): After that, when the next variable display effect is started, the background image is already fixed in the “fireworks mode” at this time, so the current variable display effect is in the “firework mode”. Is recognized by the player. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the current internal state is the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”.
In addition, when the “2 round probability variation 2” is won in this way, not only the high probability state but also the time shortening state (so-called sudden probability fluctuation) is entered. In this case, it is easy to obtain an internal lottery opportunity using the second special symbol.

[Mode transition effect]
52 and 53 are continuous diagrams showing an example of a mode transition effect.
The mode transition effect is an effect that is executed when the festival mode is entered, and is performed with reference to several subsequent fluctuations (for example, about 100 fluctuations), and whether the internal state is a high probability state or not. This is an effect to make the player guess.

  The festival mode corresponds to “2 round probability variation 1”, “small hit”, “14 round normal symbol” at the time of the first hit, and the time reduction state ends, This mode is shifted when the time shortening state ends corresponding to “14 round probability variation 2”, and corresponds to the non-time shortening state in the low probability state or the high probability state. Hereinafter, an example of the effect of mode transition will be described.

  In FIG. 51 (A): For example, the change display of the effect change is performed in the state of the “festival mode” by performing the change display of the number change after the end of the big hit game in the case of the 2-round probability change pattern 1 It has been broken. In this case, the type of the variation pattern table to be selected is “H (third special variation state)” from the end of the big hit game in the case of the 2-round probability variation symbol 1 until the variation 20th. As a result, the variation pattern of the special symbol that is the subject of variation this time becomes the third special variation, and it is assumed that the variation pattern for the mode-up effect (for example, about 17 seconds) is selected here.

[Mode-up production]
In FIG. 52 (B): During the fluctuating display effect, images representing the doors (襖) appear from both the left and right sides of the screen, and these images are displayed so as to cover the effect image including the background image. Is done.

  In FIG. 52 (C): Next, the door closing effect is performed, which makes the player feel nervous and attracts interest in the development of the subsequent effect. At this point, since the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display effect is being executed with the effect symbol reduced at the lower right corner position of the screen.

  In FIG. 53 (D): When the second half of the variable display is reached, the text information “PUSH !!” is displayed over the door image, and there is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switch button 45. Done. By displaying such character information of “PUSH !!”, it is possible to convey that the player repeatedly presses the effect switching button 45 (so-called continuous hitting) to open the door. Here, it is assumed that the player has repeatedly pressed the effect switching button 45. Further, at the lower right corner position of the screen, the variable display effect is executed with the effect symbol continuously reduced.

  In FIG. 53 (E): The door opening effect is executed when the number of times the effect switching button 45 is pressed reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the mode will finally shift. It should be noted that the “mode shift” is executed even if the number of times the effect switching button 45 is pressed does not reach a predetermined value.

[Yukata mode entry production]
53 (F): When the door (扉) is fully opened from the end of the change of the special symbol to the stop display, the text “Yukata mode entry!” Is displayed on the full screen, and the background image corresponding to it is displayed. The background image of the “yukata mode” is an image that expresses, for example, how a female character wearing a yukata becomes a close-up on the screen. By executing such a mode transition effect, it is possible to visually appeal to the player that the mode has shifted to a different mode on the effect, thereby recalling the possibility of a “high probability state” The motivation to continue the game can be maintained until the next winning is obtained (toward the next winning). When the special symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the fluctuation time, a result display effect is performed in the lower right corner position of the screen according to the non-winning mode (for example, “5”-“1”-“4”). Is called.

[Direction during yukata mode]
In FIG. 53 (G): When the next fluctuation is started, the first fluctuation display after the transition to the yukata mode is performed. This yukata mode is different from the festival mode.

[Description of each mode]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining each mode appearing in the mode effect. In any mode shown in FIG. 54, the time shortening state is a non-operating state.

  In FIG. 54 (A): “Festival mode” corresponds to “2 round probability variation 1”, “small hit”, “14 round normal symbol” at the first hit, time saving state Is completed, the mode is shifted to when the time reduction state ends corresponding to “14 round probability variation 2” at the first hit.

  54 (B): “Yukata mode” is a mode that may be shifted from “festival mode”. The expectation of the latent probability change is “low”. In the example shown in the figure, a female character wearing a yukata smiles with a fan in hand.

  54 (C): “Rival mode” is a mode that may be shifted from “Yukata mode”. The expectation of the latent probability change is “medium”. In the example shown in the figure, two female characters are displayed on the left and right to represent a state in which they are opposed to each other.

  (D) in FIG. 54: “Normal mode” is a mode that may be shifted from any of the “festival mode”, “yukata mode”, and “rival mode”. The expectation of the latent probability change is “0%”. That is, when the mode is shifted to the “normal mode”, the low probability state is determined as the internal state.

  (E) in FIG. 54: “Three sister mode” is a mode that can be shifted from any of the “festival mode”, “yukata mode”, and “rival mode”. In the example shown in the figure, three female characters wearing yukata are displayed large on the screen to express a cool expression. In this case, the expected degree of latent probability change is “100%”. That is, when the mode is shifted to the “three sisters mode”, the internal state has a high probability state.

For this reason, for example, if the internal state is a low probability state, there is room for mode transition to any of the “festival mode”, “yukata mode”, and “rival mode”, but the result of winning in the internal lottery Unless the above is obtained, the mode is finally shifted to the “normal mode”.
On the other hand, if the internal state is a high probability state, there is room for mode transition to any of the “festival mode”, “yukata mode”, and “rival mode”, but the winning result is obtained by internal lottery. As long as there is not, it will be finally shifted to "three sisters mode".
Therefore, once the mode is changed to “Normal Mode” or “Three Sister Mode”, the internal state becomes clear at that point, so such mode change is executed as long as there is no opportunity for mode change by further winning. Never happen.

  As described above, in this embodiment, various modes are adopted, and by performing an effect that the mode is appropriately shifted from the “festival mode” to the “yukata mode” and from the “yukata mode” to the “rival mode”. In this way, the player can guess the internal state and realize a variety of gameplay. However, if the internal state is kept secret forever, there is a risk that the player's willingness to play may decline, so the `` normal mode '' in which the low probability state is confirmed at an appropriate timing, and the high probability state is confirmed `` By shifting to the “three sister mode”, the fairness of the game is ensured by clearly disclosing the internal state.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 55 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a mode that is transitioned only from the fifth change to the 30th change after a major game of “14 rounds normal big hit” or “14 rounds probable two big hits” in the normal win (non-short-time win) There is a mode in which the transition is made only from the fifth variation to the 70th variation after the major game of “14 rounds of normal big hit” in the short-term win. In addition, when the coast mode transferred with the normal mid-term win is finished, the mode shifts to the “festival mode”, and when the coast mode shifted with the short-term mid-term win is over, the mode changes to the “normal mode”. The reason for shifting to the “normal mode” without going through the “festival mode” in the case of a short-time win is that there is no winning symbol that becomes a latent state after a short-time win in the short-time win. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  FIG. 55 (A): For example, after the end of the heart zone effect, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Due to the fluctuation time shortening function, the special symbol fluctuation time is basically set to the shortest shortened fluctuation time according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation when not winning. For example, the left effect symbol stops at about 1 second). In addition, due to the operation of the variable time shortening function, the operation frequency of the variable start winning device 28 becomes higher as compared with the normal time as described above, and the winning to the lower start winning port 28a occurs more frequently than the normal time. For this reason, during operation of the variable time shortening function, the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol is accumulated more frequently than usual.

  In FIG. 55 (B): Since the current change (during non-winning) has ended, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7"). In this case, the special variation state does not occur, and the aspect representing the non-special variation state is selected in the production.

  (C) in FIG. 55: The next fluctuation is started. In this coast mode, for example, “26 rounds (normal wins)” or “67 (short wins)” for “14 rounds normal big hit”, “26 rounds (14 rounds probable big hits)” ( When the “normally selected”) has passed, the game ends.

[Director during big role]
Next, FIG. 56 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the big role effect that is executed during the big hit game in the case of corresponding to “14 round probability variation 7” at the time of winning in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. is there.

[At the start of one round]
56 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game is being executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and a unique production image (for example, a female character) is displayed during the big hit game. In the lower right corner of the screen, an effect design (here, the number “6”) corresponding to the current winning design is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, the player continues to be presented with the information of “14 rounds during normal big hit”. It can be set as non-disclosure that it is “round probability change big hit”.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 56 (B): Thereafter, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to 10 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the big hit game.
In the illustrated example, the probable promotion effect is performed in 10 rounds. Specifically, an effect is displayed in which the character information “Congratulations! Probability Promotion!” Is displayed on the screen (special game high probability state disclosure effect executing means). Note that the probable promotion effect may be executed in rounds other than 10 rounds, or may be executed during a big hit ending.

[At the end of a major role]
56 (C): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “fireworks mode entry” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, the above-mentioned promotion role during the big role is an effect that is also executed when the winning combination in the time reduction state corresponds to “14 round probability variation symbol 2” to “14 round probability variation symbol 7”.

  FIG. 57 to FIG. 60 are continuous diagrams showing examples of various effects that are executed when the second special symbol is won in the normal state. Here, in the normal state, since the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability. For this reason, the variable start winning device 28 (so-called electric tulip) does not operate so much, and the winning to the lower start winning port 28a hardly occurs. However, even if the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability, there is a possibility of winning in the normal symbol lottery. Then, when the variable start winning device 28 is open for a short period of time, the winning may be luckily generated at the lower start winning port 28a. On the other hand, when returning from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state, the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended immediately before the return, so immediately after returning to the normal state, 4 corresponding to the second special symbol 4 One memory may be accumulated. Therefore, in the following description, various examples of effects executed when a winning occurs at the lower start winning opening 28a in a normal state and a winning is made with the second special symbol corresponding to the winning will be described. In addition, the following production examples are “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 3”, “14 round probability variable symbol 4” or “14 round probability variable symbol 7” in the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. It is an example of an effect performed when it corresponds to either.

[Variable display production start]
57 (A): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the variable display effect is started by scrolling the three symbol strings on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It should be noted that the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, in the illustrated example, since one marker M1 is lit and displayed, one working memory corresponding to the first special symbol is accumulated, and no marker M2 is lit and displayed. Therefore, no working memory corresponding to the second special symbol is stored.

[Generation of notice effect]
(B) in FIG. 57: Next, a picture image displaying some character appears on the screen, and the notice effect is executed in a manner of stopping at the center of the screen. In this example, for example, the design image appears suddenly from the left side of the screen, and the effect is performed in such a manner that it moves to bounce to the center of the screen as it is.

[Direction when working memory increases]
In addition, during this period, the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol has increased by 1 (a winning to the lower start winning opening 28a has occurred), and an effect of lighting and displaying only one marker M2 is performed. Yes. Such an effect is that, for example, the number of working memories corresponding to the second special symbol has increased by one by causing a new symbol to appear at a position where the symbol (heart figure) of the marker M2 has not been displayed. This is done for the purpose of teaching the player on the production.

[Stop of left design]
(C) in FIG. 57: With respect to the effect symbol that is currently being displayed in a varying manner, it has progressed to the stage where the left effect symbol has stopped. Further, in the illustrated example, it is expressed that the previous notice effect has not progressed to the next stage. As a result, the player can be informed that the expectation of the big hit is not so much with respect to the current variation.

[Result display effect]
In FIG. 57 (D): With respect to the effect symbols that have been displayed in a variable manner until then, the change display is also stopped for the right effect symbol and the medium effect symbol, so that the result display effect is executed. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

[Start of next change]
(E) in FIG. 58: After this, for example, when the fixed stop time of the first special symbol elapses, the display of the variation of the second special symbol is started when the next start condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when both the operation memory of the first special symbol and the operation memory of the second special symbol are present, the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (operation of the second special symbol). Memory is given priority). For this reason, in the state shown in the drawing, not the operation memory of the first special symbol but the operation memory of the second special symbol is consumed first, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. Then, substantially in synchronization with the start of the change of the second special symbol, the change display effect is started in such a way that the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scroll in the vertical direction on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Is done. As for the marker M2, as the working memory of the second special symbol is consumed, one symbol that has been at the head position (here, the left end position) is deleted, and the marker M1 is left as it is. The state of is maintained. Here, the winning result is obtained by the second special symbol lottery, and the winning symbol of “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 3” or “14 round probability variable symbol 4” is selected. Is assumed. It should be noted that the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Stage progress notice effect (first stage)]
58 (F): Next, during the execution of the variable display effect, the first stage advance notice effect (pre-reach notice effect) using the female character's pattern image (reference numeral SU1) is performed. This stage advance notice effect is a notice effect in which a change in mode progresses step by step from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this stage advance notice effect is displayed in such a manner that it suddenly appears at the corner position of the liquid crystal screen. Note that the “stage advance notice effect” here is a notice effect with content that suggests that there is a possibility that the effect symbol may be stopped and displayed in a winning manner according to the progress of the effect.

[Stage progress notice effect (2nd stage)]
In FIG. 58 (G): The stage advance notice effect of the second stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the first stage. In the illustrated example, another female character SU2 additionally appears from the lower right position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female character SU1 that has been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (3rd stage)]
In FIG. 58 (H): The stage advance notice effect at the third stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect at the second stage. In the illustrated example, the third female character SU3 additionally appears from the upper left position of the screen and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 and SU2 that have been displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (4th stage)]
In FIG. 59, (I): The stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the third stage. In the illustrated example, a fourth female character SU4 additionally appears from the upper right position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU3 displayed previously.

[Stage progress notice effect (5th stage)]
In FIG. 59 (J): The stage advance notice effect of the fifth stage is executed following the stage advance notice effect of the fourth stage. In the example shown in the figure, the fifth female character SU5 appears as a close-up at the center position of the screen, and is displayed on the screen together with the female characters SU1 to SU4 displayed previously. At this time, the left effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 59 (K): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol is stopped and displayed thereafter. At this time, the right effect design representing the number “6” is stopped and displayed at the middle position of the screen. When the right effect design is stopped and displayed, the reach state of the numbers “6”-“being changed”-“6” is generated in a horizontal line (on one line) on the screen. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed.

[Advance notice after reach]
In FIG. 59, (L): When a reach state occurs, for example, a notice effect after the occurrence of reach is performed in which images representing “star” figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. In this case, since the “star cluster” image is suddenly displayed on the screen, the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice presentation effect after the visually lively reach notice occurrence, an effect of giving the player a greater expectation can be obtained. In addition, although the notice effect after the occurrence of reach described above has been described with the example of “heart group”, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach this time is described with an example of “star group”. Thus, by varying the type of image used for the group itself, it is possible to increase or decrease the reliability of the big hit of the notice effect after the occurrence of reach. The reach state continues even after the post-reach notice effect is executed, and thereafter, the reach effect (FIG. 42) described above may be executed, or another reach effect may be executed.

[Result display effect]
In FIG. 60, (M): After any reach effect, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the second special symbol ("6"-"6"-" 6 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a winning manner (for example, red display color).

[Big hit game]
In FIG. 60 (N): A big hit game is started when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. Here, even if it corresponds to any of “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variation symbol 3”, or “14 round probability variation symbol 4”, 14 rounds of real 10 round jackpot game is executed.

[Heart Zone Production]
In FIG. 60, (O): After the end of 14 rounds and 10 rounds big hit game, the above heart zone effect is executed. Here, even if it corresponds to any of “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variable symbol 3” or “14 round probability variable symbol 4”, it will become “heart zone effect” after the end of the big hit game. storm in.

[Successful production of heart zone]
In FIG. 60 (P): If the “14th round probability variation 3” was selected at the time of winning the second special symbol lottery, “long special variation state” was selected at the first change of the heart zone, and the probability variation promotion effect was achieved. Succeeded and entered the “Fireworks Mode” from the second fluctuation. If the 14th round probability variation symbol 4 or 14th round probability variation symbol 7 is met at the time of winning the second special symbol lottery, the “short special variation state” or “long” Although either “special variation state” is selected, the probability variation promotion effect is not successful (high probability state non-disclosure effect execution means), but “long special variation state” is selected at the second variation, and the probability variation promotion is performed. The production is successful (high-probability state disclosure production execution means), and the “fireworks mode” is entered from the third fluctuation.

[Heart zone production failure]
In FIG. 60 (Q): When the 14th round of the special symbol lottery was selected, the “14th round normal symbol” was applied, and during the first to fourth fluctuations of the heart zone, “short special fluctuation state” or “long” Although one of the “special variation state” is selected, the probability variation promotion effect is not succeeded (only the promotion failure effect is executed), and the “coast mode” is entered from the fifth variation.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the second special symbol happens to fluctuate in the normal state and the winning result is obtained, the “14 round normal symbol”, “14 round probability variation symbol 3”, “ If it corresponds to either “14th round probability variation 4” or “14th round probability variation 7”, the heart zone effect is executed. For this reason, even when the selection of the second special symbol does not fall under “14 round probability variation 8”, the expectation of the high probability state is not immediately lost, but a certain expectation You can then proceed with the game.

  In addition, regarding “14 rounds probable variation 7”, when the first symbol lottery is passed, the promotion role of the big role is executed, but when the second symbol lottery is passed, the promotion effect in the heart zone is Therefore, the probability change promotion rate in the heart zone can be increased accordingly, and a more promising special zone effect can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the lower start winning opening 28a is a winning opening that is difficult to generate a winning in a normal state. For this reason, it is extremely rare that a winning to the lower starting winning opening 28a occurs in a normal state and the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery based on the winning is won. It is not zero. Therefore, although it is a thin event, the pachinko machine 1 which can respond flexibly to any event can be provided by taking effective measures against such an event. .

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effects, reach effects, pre-reach notice effects, post-reach notice effects, jackpot effects, heart zone effects, various mode effects, and prominent promotion effects are all controlled through the following control processes. Yes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), lamp driving process (step S406), and acoustic driving. This includes a subroutine group of processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, and a (special symbol) decrease in the operating memory number Time production command, start opening winning tone control command, demonstration production command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, etc. is there.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described memory number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the result display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a pattern of various notice effects (notice effect before the occurrence of reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed contents of the effect (acts as various effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, the light emitting units 41, 312, and 322 based on the control signal (turns on or off, flashes, changes in luminance gradation, etc.).

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 makes a predetermined timing with respect to the lamp drive circuit 132, for example, reach, notice effect, button press, cut-in occurrence, heart zone effect. A control signal is output when a predetermined movement trigger such as the above occurs. As a result, the movable accessory device operates using various motors M3, M4, etc. as drive sources, for example, performs various effects in synchronization with the display of images by the liquid crystal display 42, or the movable accessory device alone. Performing production operations.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the symbol effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of effect symbol management processing. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 14) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (the lottery result, the winning type, the variation pattern, etc.), or the pattern of the advance effect (the advance notice pattern before reach occurrence, the advance notice after reach occurrence). Pattern, pre-determination notice effect pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the result display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the result display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed within the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the result display effect. As a result, the result display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (execution of the symbol effect) means). At the time of winning or small winning of the 2nd round probability change, the result display effect is executed in a manner similar to or close to the loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a big hit of 14 rounds in the large classification, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 14-round proactive effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and this is selected to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Instruct. As a result, the image of the big hit effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses. For example, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned role-promoting promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) during the round. Then, when it is determined that the execution condition of the prominent promotion effect is satisfied (for example, the stop symbol command is confirmed, and the winning symbol in the first special symbol lottery at normal time is selected and the winning symbol is changed to “14 round probable symbol 7”). If it is determined that it has been determined), an appropriate production pattern of the probable change promotion effect is selected according to the number of rounds at that time. On the other hand, for example, in the case of big hits and small hits in two rounds, the effect control CPU 126 selects special effects patterns (mode transition effect patterns) for two rounds of big hits and small hits as the contents of effects displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. This is instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146).

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 61) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 61). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance in pairs with the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can do.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display The mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  Although the above procedure corresponds to “small hit”, if it corresponds to 14 round big hit or 2 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The types of effect symbols determined here include those constituting the “combination at the time of two rounds big hit” in addition to those constituting the above “hit combination”. In addition, the combination at the time of 2 round big hits shall be a combination of regular numbers such as “1-2-3” and “3-5-7” as described above (so-called chance win) Can do. Further, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. In addition, after the big hit game is finished, it is classified as “outlier fluctuation in special fluctuation state” and “outlier fluctuation in non-special fluctuation state” together with the above “heart zone” and “various modes”. A production pattern is defined. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.).

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a pre-reach pre-announcement effect, a post-reach pre-notification effect, a pre-determined pre-notification effect, and the like, and an effect pattern is defined in advance.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes background image selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting various background images according to the internal state. Note that the details of the specific control will be described later using still another flowchart.

  Step S618: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes specific processing relating to the mode effect (stage effect, zone effect). The mode effect is executed using a plurality of background images (mode effect execution means), and when a predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied during the execution of the mode effect, the mode image is changed by changing the background image. (Mode transition production execution means). Note that the details of the specific control will be described later using still another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 62), the variation display effect and the result display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (symbol effect executing means), A notice effect is executed based on various notice effect patterns.

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the off-time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 can set various variable effect pattern numbers to be executed at the time of deviation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received variation pattern command in detail. As a result, the effect control CPU 126 can recognize under what conditions (the current game state and the effect mode after the end of the big hit game) the current deviation variation is performed.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 determines that the current deviation fluctuation is one of the “special fluctuation state”, that is, the “first special fluctuation state”, the “second special fluctuation state”, or the “third special fluctuation state”. Check whether it is applicable. If it does not correspond to the “special variation state” in particular (No), the effect control CPU 126 proceeds to step S708.

  Step S708: In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes a non-special variation state effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 acquires the “fluctuation effect pattern number at the time of deviation” from the change effect pattern table stored in advance in the ROM 128 based on the change pattern command. In the variation effect pattern table, “variation effect pattern number at detachment” corresponding to each variation pattern command (at the time of detachment) given for each gaming state is assigned.

  Step S710: Then, the effect control CPU 126 sets the deviation variation effect pattern number in the transmission buffer, and returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing.

On the other hand, when this outlier fluctuation corresponds to one of the above-mentioned “special fluctuation states”, that is, “first special fluctuation state”, “second special fluctuation state”, or “third special fluctuation state” (steps). S702: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S704.
Step S704: In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes a special variation state effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 acquires the “special variation state effect pattern number” from the special change state effect pattern table stored in advance in the ROM 128 based on the change pattern command. In the special variation state effect pattern table, the corresponding “special variation state effect pattern number” is assigned to each of the variation pattern numbers corresponding to the “first special variation state” to “third special variation state”. .

  Step S706: Then, the effect control CPU 126 sets the special variation state effect pattern number in the transmission buffer, and returns to the effect symbol change pre-process. Based on the special variation state effect pattern number set here, various special variation state effects (FIGS. 44 to 47, 52, 53, etc.) are actually executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. .

[Background image selection processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the background image selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether either the first special variation pattern or the second special variation pattern is selected for the current variation. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can be realized by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that either the first special variation pattern or the second special variation pattern is selected for the current variation (step S800: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that neither the first special variation pattern nor the second special variation pattern is selected for the current variation (step S800: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (step S802: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is not the time reduction state (step S802: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S808.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is a high probability state (step S804: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S810. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is not a high probability state (step S804: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S812.

Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the heart zone. Specifically, the process of selecting the background image of FIGS. 44 to 47 is executed.
Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting background images for various modes. Specifically, processing for selecting a background image (FIG. 54) such as “normal mode”, “festival mode”, “yukata mode”, “rival mode”, “three sisters mode” is executed. Here, the mode image to be selected can be realized, for example, by referring to the mode status value stored in the RAM 130. Here, the “mode status” is a variable that holds an identification number corresponding to each mode, zone, and stage, and the value is updated each time a mode transition or the like is performed. A unique identification number is assigned to each mode, zone, and stage, and by referring to the value of the mode status, it is possible to recognize in which mode the game is currently being executed. Note that the initial value of the mode status is set to a value for the normal mode.

Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the fireworks mode. Specifically, a process of selecting a background image such as (H) (I) in FIG. 51 is executed.
Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the coast mode. Specifically, the process of selecting the background image in FIG. 55 is executed.

  In any case, when the process of step S806, step S808, step S810, or step S812 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 63).

[Mode production management process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the mode effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S900: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the mode transition effect execution condition is satisfied.

  As to whether or not the mode transition effect execution condition is satisfied, the value of the mode status stored in the RAM 130 is checked, and the value is “staying in the festival mode”, “staying in the yukata mode” or “staying in the rival mode” And the mode transition lottery (for example, about 1/10 production lottery) is won, it can be determined that the mode transition production execution condition is satisfied.

  As a result, when it is determined that the mode transition effect execution condition is satisfied (step S900: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode transition effect execution condition is not satisfied (step S900: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 63).

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes a transition destination mode selection process. Specifically, a process for determining which mode to shift from the currently staying mode is executed. For example, if staying in the festival mode in a high probability state, the candidate for the transition destination is the yukata mode, the rival mode, and the three sister mode, and the transition destination is randomly determined from among these by a predetermined lottery. Since the three-sister mode is a mode in which a high probability state is determined, it is difficult to select as a transition destination in the initial stage, and exceeds a certain number of fluctuations (for example, about 50 fluctuations after winning two rounds of positive variation 1). At this stage, it may be easy to be selected as a migration destination.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not a variation pattern for mode-up effect is selected. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can be realized by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the variation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern for the mode-up effect is selected for the current variation (step S904: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern for the mode-up effect is not selected for the current variation (step S904: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S908.

Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode up chance effect selection process. Specifically, the process of selecting the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is executed. In this case, since a somewhat longer variation time is secured, a mode transition effect with a high effect can be executed.
Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode transition effect selection process. Here, the “normal mode transition effect selection process” is a process of simply selecting an effect pattern for switching the background image within the variation time of the selected variation pattern. When executing the mode transition effect, it is only necessary to select the variation pattern for the mode-up effect, but the variation pattern for the mode-up effect may not be selected. There is a possibility that it cannot be secured. Therefore, in such a case, the mode transition effect is executed by simply selecting the effect pattern for switching the background image.

  In any case, when the process of step S906 or step S908 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 63).

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The selection method of the variation pattern table mentioned in the embodiment is a preferable example and is not limited to this.

  In addition, various aspects of the effects listed in the embodiment are merely examples, and in particular, the “heart zone effect”, the various “mode effects”, and the like may be performed in other aspects. Furthermore, although the “heart zone effect” has been described as an example in which the probable change promotion effect is executed using the movable accessory device, the probable change promotion effect may be executed without using the movable accessory device.

  Moreover, the structure of the pachinko machine 1, a board | substrate surface structure, etc. are a preferable illustration including the thing of illustration, and it cannot be overemphasized that these can be deform | transformed suitably.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Upper start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Lower start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol Display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

On condition that one of the first predetermined event and the second predetermined event a lottery triggered during the game occurs, a lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery,
When the internal lottery is executed by the lottery execution means, the first symbol or the second symbol corresponding to the first predetermined event or the second predetermined event is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined variable time, A symbol display means for stopping and displaying the first symbol or the second symbol in a manner corresponding to the result of an internal lottery;
A first symbol winning type prescribing means for predefining a plurality of winning types including at least a special winning type with respect to a winning result obtained in the internal lottery executed on the condition that the first predetermined event has occurred;
Second symbol winning type defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of winning types including at least the special winning type with respect to a winning result obtained in the internal lottery executed on the condition that the second predetermined event has occurred; ,
When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, it is determined which of the plurality of winning types defined by the first symbol winning type defining means or the second symbol winning type defining means is the current winning Winning type determination means;
The first symbol or the second symbol is with respect to variation time displayed varies by at least said symbol display means, a variation pattern defining means for defining a plurality of kinds of variation patterns including special variation pattern in advance,
A variation pattern selection unit that selects one of the plurality of types of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining unit when the variation display of the first symbol or the second symbol is performed by the symbol display unit;
The result of the inner lottery results were corresponds to the winning, when the first symbol or the second symbol in a manner that represents the winning by the symbol display means is stopped and displayed, a special game execution means for executing a special game,
The results of the previous SL internal lottery corresponds to the winning, and the after completion of the second symbol win types defined above are defined by means executed when it is determined to correspond to the special winning type was the special game a fluctuation pattern regulating means you regulate variation pattern selecting means types of selectable the fluctuation pattern of the special variation pattern,
When it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the special winning type specified by the first symbol winning type specifying means or the second symbol winning type specifying means is determined, the special game is executed. After completion of the special game by the means, at the time of execution of the internal lottery by the lottery execution means, a high probability state to which a higher winning probability is applied than at least a low probability state to which a normal winning probability is applied is set. High probability state setting means;
In the special game that is executed when it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the special winning type specified by the first symbol winning type defining means is determined, the high probability state setting is performed. A special game medium high probability state disclosure effect executing means for executing a special game medium high probability state disclosure effect with the content disclosing that the high probability state is set by means;
After the special game executed when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the game is determined to fall under the special winning type defined by the second symbol winning type defining means, the internal lottery is completed. When the result of non-winning is obtained in the above, it is disclosed that the high probability state is set by the high probability state setting unit using the special variation time of the special variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selecting unit. A high probability state disclosure effect executing means for executing a high probability state disclosure effect of the content to be played . In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The variation pattern defining means includes
As the plurality of types of variation patterns, a basic variation pattern different from the special variation pattern is defined,
The fluctuation pattern regulating means is
After the end of the special game executed when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and it is determined that the special winning type specified by the first symbol winning type defining means is determined, the variation pattern While the type of the variation pattern that can be selected by the selection unit is restricted to the basic variation pattern, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and the special winning type defined by the second symbol winning type defining unit After the special game executed when it is determined to fall under the above, the post-special game variation corresponding to the number of display variations of the first symbol or the second symbol performed by the symbol display means For the special period until the number of times reaches the specified number, the type of the variation pattern that can be selected by the variation pattern selection means is restricted to the special variation pattern. Wherein the period other than the special period restricting the type of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern selecting means may select the fundamental wobble pattern,
The special game after the end of the special game executed when it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and the special winning type specified by the second symbol winning type specifying means is determined. If the number of post-changes is less than the specified number of times, and if the result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, using the special change time of the special change pattern selected by the change pattern selection means, A high probability state non-disclosure effect executing means for executing a high probability state non-disclosure effect of the content that the high probability state is set by the high probability state setting means ;
The high probability state disclosure effect executing means is
The special game after the end of the special game executed when it is determined that the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and the special winning type specified by the second symbol winning type specifying means is determined. When the number of subsequent fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, and when a result of non-winning is obtained in the internal lottery, using the special fluctuation time of the special fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means, gaming machine, wherein the benzalkonium execute the high-probability state disclosure effect of the disclosed subject matter that the high probability state is set by the high probability state setting means.